HP Hewlett Packard Color LaserJet CM6049f MFP User Manual

HP Color LaserJet CM6049f MFP  
User Guide  
HP Color LaserJet CM6049f MFP  
User Guide  
Copyright and License  
Trademark Credits  
Adobe®, Acrobat®, and PostScript® are  
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.  
© 2009 Copyright Hewlett-Packard  
Development Company, L.P.  
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation  
without prior written permission is prohibited,  
except as allowed under the copyright laws.  
Corel® is a trademark or registered  
trademark of Corel Corporation or Corel  
Corporation Limited.  
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT®  
are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation.  
The information contained herein is subject  
to change without notice.  
The only warranties for HP products and  
services are set forth in the express warranty  
statements accompanying such products  
and services. Nothing herein should be  
construed as constituting an additional  
warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical  
or editorial errors or omissions contained  
herein.  
Windows Vista™ is either a registered  
trademark or trademark of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other  
countries.  
PANTONE® is Pantone, Inc's check-  
standard trademark for color.  
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The Open  
Group.  
Part number: CE799-90904  
Edition 1, 06/2009  
ENERGY STAR® and the ENERGY STAR  
logo® are U.S. registered marks of the United  
States Environmental Protection Agency.  
Table of contents  
2 Control panel  
ENWW  
iii  
3 Software for Windows  
4 Use the product with Macintosh  
iv  
ENWW  
6 Network configuration  
7 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
v
Choose the correct orientation for loading letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-  
8 Use product features  
vi  
ENWW  
9 Print tasks  
10 Use color  
ENWW  
vii  
11 Copy  
12 Scan and send to e-mail  
13 Fax  
viii  
ENWW  
14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
ix  
15 Solve problems  
x
ENWW  
Appendix A Supplies and accessories  
ENWW  
xi  
Appendix B Product specifications  
Appendix C Regulatory information  
xii  
ENWW  
xiv  
ENWW  
1 Product basics  
ENWW  
1
   
Product introduction  
Figure 1-1 HP Color LaserJet CM6049f MFP (CE799A)  
The HP Color LaserJet CM6049f MFP comes standard with the following items:  
100-sheet multipurpose input tray (Tray 1)  
40 ppm  
Four 500-sheet input trays  
Automatic document feeder (ADF) that holds up to 50 pages  
HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10/100Base-TX network  
512 megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM)  
Duplexer  
Hard drive  
Analog fax  
2
Chapter 1 Product basics  
ENWW  
 
Product features  
Table 1-1 Features  
Speed and throughput  
Print up to 40 ppm on letter-size paper.  
Less than 11 seconds to print the first page  
Recommended maximum monthly print volume of 15,000 pages  
An 835 megahertz (MHz) microprocessor  
Duplex at speed  
Resolution  
Memory  
600 dots per inch (dpi) with Image Resolution Enhancement technology 4800 for optimum  
overall imaging  
1200 x 600 dpi for detailed line work and small text  
512 MB of random-access memory (RAM), expandable to 768 MB by using 200-pin small  
outline dual inline memory modules (SODIMM) that support 128 or 256 MB of RAM.  
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) automatically compresses data to use RAM more  
efficiently.  
User interface  
HP Easy Select Control Panel  
Drivers  
HP provides the following drivers for downloading:  
HP Universal Print Driver (UPD): Postscript, PCL 6, PCL 5  
Mac Driver  
Linux  
SAP  
UNIX Model Script  
Drivers for this product are available at www.hp.com/go/cljcm6049mfp_software or your country/  
region alternative.  
Languages and fonts  
HP Printer Control Language (PCL) 6  
HP Universal Printer Driver (UPD) PCL 5  
HP Universal Printer Driver (UPD) postscript (PS)  
Printer Management Language  
80 scalable TrueType PS typefaces  
Print cartridges/image  
drums (4 of each)  
Two-part toner/imaging system  
Black print cartridges print up to 19,500 pages at 5% coverage  
Color print cartridges print up to 21,000 pages at 5% coverage  
Image drums print up to 35,000 pages at 5% coverage  
Authentic HP print cartridge detection  
Automatic toner strip remover  
ENWW  
Product features  
3
   
Table 1-1 Features (continued)  
Paper-handling  
Input  
Tray 1 (multipurpose tray): A multipurpose tray for paper, transparencies, labels,  
envelopes and other paper types. See Supported paper types on page 98 for a list  
of paper types. The tray holds up to 100 sheets of paper, 50 transparencies, or  
Tray 2, 3, 4, and 5: 500-sheet trays. These trays automatically detect common paper  
sizes and allow printing on custom-size paper. Tray 2 supports up to 279 x 432 mm  
(11 x 17 inches) and A3 paper sizes, and Trays 3,4, and 5 support sizes up to 305 x  
457 mm (12 x 18 inches), and SRA3. See Supported paper and print media sizes  
on page 95 for a list of supported paper sizes. For a list of supported paper types,  
Automatic document feeder (ADF): Holds up to 50 sheets of paper.  
ADF duplex scanning: The ADF has an automatic duplexer for scanning two-sided  
documents.  
Duplex printing: Provides automatic two-sided printing (printing on both sides of the  
paper).  
The paper size range for automatic duplex printing is 175 mm to 320 mm (6.9 to 12.6  
inches) x 210 mm to 457 mm (8.3 to 18 inches). The media weight range is 60–220  
g/m² (16-58 lb).  
Output  
Standard output bin: The standard output bin is located underneath the scanner on  
the top of the product. This bin can hold up to 500 sheets of paper. The product  
provides a sensor that indicates when the bin is full.  
Optional 3-bin stapler/stacker: Provides job separation in multiple output bins,  
convenient stapling (up to 50-sheet jobs), job offset capability, and additional output  
capacity. The stacker has three bins: a 100-sheet bin, a 500-sheet bin, and a 1000-  
sheet bin.  
Optional booklet maker finisher: Provides convenient stapling (up to 50-sheet jobs),  
saddle-stitching (up to 15-sheet booklets), single-sheet v-folding, job separation and  
offset capability, as well as additional output capacity. The booklet maker finisher has  
three bins: two 1000-sheet bins and one bin that can hold up to 25 saddle-stitched  
booklets.  
ADF output bin: The ADF output bin is underneath the ADF input tray. The bin holds  
up to 50 sheets of paper, and the product automatically stops when this bin is full.  
Supported operating  
systems  
Windows 2000®  
Windows XP®  
Windows Server 2003®  
Windows Server 2008®  
Windows Vista™  
Macintosh OS  
Connectivity  
Local area network (LAN) connector (RJ-45) for the embedded HP Jetdirect print server  
One enhanced input/output (EIO) slot  
USB 2.0 connection  
Optional analog fax card  
4
Chapter 1 Product basics  
ENWW  
           
Table 1-1 Features (continued)  
Environmental features  
Sleep setting saves energy.  
High content of recyclable components and materials.  
Secure Disk Erase  
Security features  
Security lock (optional)  
Job retention  
User PIN authentication for stored jobs  
DSS authentication  
IPv6 security  
Copying and sending  
Modes for text, graphics, and mixed text and graphics formats  
Job-interrupt feature  
Multiple pages per sheet  
Control panel animations (for example, jam recovery)  
Scan and send to e-mail  
Local address book for e-mail and fax  
LDAP addressing  
Send to folder  
Automatic duplex (two-sided) scanning  
ENWW  
Product features  
5
   
Product walkaround  
Front view  
HP Color LaserJet CM6049f MFP  
1
2
3
4
10  
9
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
Control panel  
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) top cover  
ADF input tray for copy/scan/fax originals  
ADF output bin  
Right-door (provides access to the transfer unit, transfer roller, and fuser unit)  
On/Off switch  
Lower right door  
Trays 2, 3, 4 and 5  
Front cover (provides access to print cartridges and image drums)  
Output bin  
6
Chapter 1 Product basics  
ENWW  
       
Back view  
1
2
Interface ports and formatter  
Lock lever for additional input bins  
ENWW  
Product walkaround  
7
 
Interface ports  
The product has five ports for connecting to a computer or a network. The ports are at the left, rear  
corner of the product.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fax connection (when installed)  
Scanner cable  
Access port for Kensington lock  
USB 2.0 port  
EIO expansion slot  
Network port  
8
Chapter 1 Product basics  
ENWW  
   
Serial number and model number location  
The model number and serial number are listed on identification labels located on the rear of the printer.  
The serial number contains information about the country/region of origin, the printer version, production  
code, and the production number of the printer.  
Model name  
Model number  
HP Color LaserJet CM6049f MFP  
CE799A  
ENWW  
Product walkaround  
9
 
10 Chapter 1 Product basics  
ENWW  
Use the control panel  
The control panel has a VGA touchscreen that provides access to all device functions. Use the buttons  
and numeric keypad to control jobs and the device status. The LEDs indicate overall device status.  
Control-panel layout  
The control panel includes a touchscreen graphical display, job-control buttons, a numeric keypad, and  
three light-emitting diode (LED) status lights.  
1
2
3
4
10  
9
5
6
8
7
1
Touchscreen graphical display  
Numeric keypad  
Use the touchscreen to open and set up all device functions.  
2
Allows you to type numeric values for number of copies required and other  
numeric values.  
3
4
Reset button  
Sleep button  
Resets the job settings to factory or user-defined default values.  
If the device is inactive for a long period of time, it automatically enters a  
sleep mode. To place the device into sleep mode or to reactivate the device,  
press the Sleep button.  
5
6
Stop button  
Start button  
Stops the active job and opens the Job Status screen.  
Begins a copy job, starts digital sending, or continues a job that has been  
interrupted.  
7
8
Attention light  
Ready light  
The Attention light indicates that the device has a condition that requires  
intervention. Examples include an empty paper tray or an error message  
on the touchscreen.  
The Ready light indicates that the device is ready to begin processing any  
job.  
9
Data light  
The Data light indicates that the device is receiving data.  
10  
Contrast-adjustment dial  
Turn the dial to adjust the contrast of the touchscreen display for your  
viewing angle.  
12 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
     
Home screen  
The home screen provides access to the device features, and it indicates the current status of the device.  
NOTE: Depending on how the device has been configured, the features that appear on the home  
screen can vary.  
2
3 4  
5
6
1
9
8
7
1
Features  
Depending on how the system administrator has configured the device, the features that appear  
in this area can include any of the following items:  
Copy  
Fax  
E-mail  
Secondary E-mail  
Job Status  
Network Folder  
Job Storage  
Workflow  
Supplies Status  
Administration  
2
Device status line  
The status line provides information about the overall device status. Various buttons appear in  
this area, depending on the current status. For a description of each button that can appear in  
the status line, see Buttons on the touchscreen on page 14.  
3
4
5
6
7
Copy type  
Copy count  
Help button  
Scroll bar  
Sign Out  
Shows whether copies are color.  
The copy count box indicates the number of copies that the device is set to make.  
Touch the Help button to open the embedded help system.  
Touch the up or down arrows on the scroll bar to see the complete list of available features.  
Touch Sign Out to sign out of the device if you have signed in for access to restricted features.  
After you sign out, the device restores all options to the default settings.  
8
9
Network Address  
Date and time  
Touch Network Address to find information about the network connection.  
The current date and time appear here. The system administrator can select the format that  
the device uses to show the date and time, for example 12-hour format or 24-hour format.  
ENWW  
Use the control panel 13  
 
Buttons on the touchscreen  
The status line on the touchscreen provides information about the status of the device. Various buttons  
can appear in this area. The following table describes each button.  
Home button. Touch the home button to go to the Home screen from any other screen.  
Start button. Touch the Start button to begin the action for the feature that you are using.  
NOTE: The name of this button changes for each feature. For example, in the Copy feature, the button  
is named Start Copy.  
Stop button. If the device is processing a print or fax job, the Stop button appears instead of the Start  
button. Touch the Stop button to halt the current job. The device prompts you to cancel the job or to resume  
it.  
Error button. The error button appears whenever the device has an error that requires attention before  
it can continue. Touch the error button to see a message that describes the error. The message also has  
instructions for solving the problem.  
Warning button. The warning button appears when the device has a problem but can continue  
functioning. Touch the warning button to see a message that describes the problem. The message also  
has instructions for solving the problem.  
Help button. Touch the help button to open the built-in online Help system. For more information, see  
Control-panel help system  
The device has a built-in Help system that explains how to use each screen. To open the Help system,  
touch the Help button  
in the upper-right corner of the screen.  
For some screens, the Help opens to a global menu where you can search for specific topics. You can  
browse through the menu structure by touching the buttons in the menu.  
For screens that contain settings for individual jobs, the Help opens to a topic that explains the options  
for that screen.  
If the device alerts you of an error or warning, touch the error  
or warning  
button to open a message  
that describes the problem. The message also contains instructions to help solve the problem.  
14 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
               
Navigate the Administration menu  
From the Home screen, touch Administration to open the menu structure. You might need to scroll to  
the bottom of the Home screen to see this feature.  
The Administration menu has several sub-menus, which are listed on the left side of the screen. Touch  
the name of a menu to expand the structure. A plus sign (+) next to a menu name means that it contains  
sub-menus. Continue opening the structure until you reach the option that you want to configure. To  
return to the previous level, touch Back.  
To exit the Administration menu, touch the Home button  
in the upper-left corner of the screen.  
The device has built-in Help that explains each of the features that are available through the menus.  
Help is available for many menus on the right-hand side of the touchscreen. Or, to open the global Help  
system, touch the Help button  
in the upper-right corner of the screen.  
The tables in the sections that follow indicate the overall structure of each menu under the Administration  
menu.  
ENWW  
Navigate the Administration menu 15  
 
Information menu  
Administration > Information  
Use this menu to print information pages and reports that are stored internally on the device.  
Table 2-1 Information menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Configuration/Status Administration Menu  
Print  
Shows the basic structure of the  
Administration menu and current  
administration settings.  
Pages  
Map  
Configuration/status  
Pages  
Print  
Print  
Print  
A set of configuration pages that show the  
current device settings.  
Supplies Status  
Page  
Shows the status of supplies such as  
cartridges, maintenance kits, and staples.  
Usage Page  
Shows information about the number of  
pages that have been printed on each paper  
type and size.  
Color Usage Job Log  
Print  
Print  
A directory page that contains job-by-job  
color usage information. Page content  
includes the user name, application name,  
and number of black-only pages and color  
pages.  
File Directory  
A directory page that contains information for  
any mass-storage devices, such as flash  
drives, memory cards, or hard disks, that are  
installed in this device.  
Fax Reports  
Fax Activity Log  
Fax Call Report  
Print  
Print  
Contains a list of the faxes that have been  
sent from or received by this device.  
Fax Call Report  
A detailed report of the last fax operation,  
either sent or received.  
Thumbnail on Report Yes  
No (default)  
Choose whether or not to include a thumbnail  
of the first page of the fax on the call report.  
When to Print Report Never auto print  
Print after any fax job  
Print after fax send jobs  
Print after any fax error (default)  
Print after send errors only  
Print after receive errors only  
Billing Codes Report  
Print  
A list of billing codes that have been used for  
outgoing faxes. This report shows how many  
sent faxes were billed to each code.  
Blocked Fax List  
Speed Dial List  
Print  
Print  
A list of phone numbers that are blocked from  
sending faxes to this device.  
Shows the speed dials that have been set up  
for this device.  
16 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
       
Table 2-1 Information menu (continued)  
Menu item Sub-menu item Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Sample Pages/Fonts Demonstration Page  
RGB Samples  
Print  
Printout of a page highlighting the print  
capabilities of the product.  
Print  
Print  
Printout of color samples for different RGB  
values. The samples act as a guide for color  
matching.  
CMYK Samples  
Printout of color samples for different CMYK  
values. The samples act as a guide for color  
matching.  
PCL Font List  
PS Font List  
Print  
Print  
A list of printer control language (PCL) fonts  
that are currently available on the device.  
A list of PostScript (PS) fonts that are  
currently available on the device.  
ENWW  
Information menu 17  
 
Default Job Options menu  
Administration > Default Job Options  
Use this menu to define the default job options for each function. These are used if the user does not  
specify other options when creating the job.  
Default Options for Originals  
Administration > Default Job Options > Default Options For Originals  
Table 2-2 Default Options for Originals menu  
Menu item  
Values  
Description  
Paper Size  
Select a paper size from the list. Select the paper size that is most often used for copy or scan  
originals.  
Number of Sides  
Orientation  
1
Select whether copy or scan originals are most often single-sided or  
double-sided.  
2
Portrait  
Landscape  
Select the orientation that is most often used for copy or scan  
originals. Select Portrait if the short edge is at the top or select  
Landscape if the long edge is at the top.  
Optimize Text/Picture  
Manually Adjust  
Text  
Optimize the output for a particular type of original: text, pictures, or  
a mixture of both.  
If you select Manually Adjust, specify the mix of text and pictures that  
is used most often.  
Printed Picture  
Photograph  
18 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
   
Image adjustment  
Administration > Default Job Options > Image Adjustment  
Table 2-3 Image Adjustment menu  
Menu item  
Values  
Description  
Darkness  
Select a value.  
Select the level of density (darkness) for the output.  
Background Cleanup  
Adjust the value within the range. Increase the Background Removal setting to remove faint images  
from the background or to remove a light background color.  
Sharpness  
Adjust the value within the range. Adjust the Sharpness setting to clarify or soften the image.  
ENWW  
Default Job Options menu 19  
 
Default Copy Options  
Administration > Default Job Options > Default Copy Options  
Table 2-4 Default Copy Options menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Number of Copies  
Type the number of  
copies. The factory  
default setting is 1.  
Set the default number of copies for a copy job.  
Number of Sides  
Color/Black  
1
Set the default number of sides for copies.  
2
Auto detect  
Color  
Choose whether the default copy mode is color or  
black.  
Black (default)  
None (default)  
One left angled  
Two left  
Staple/Collate  
Staple  
Set up options for stapling and collating sets of copies.  
If Collate is selected, the device prints a complete copy  
before starting on the next copy. Otherwise, the device  
prints the first page of all copies before printing the  
second page, and so on.  
Two top  
The staple and collate feature may not be present in  
your product. These features depend on the optional  
output accessory installed.  
One right angled  
Two right  
Off  
Collate  
On (default)  
<Binname>  
Output Bin  
Select the default output bin for copies.  
This option is available only if an optional output  
accessory is installed.  
Edge-To-Edge  
Normal (recommended)  
(default)  
If the original document is printed close to the edges,  
use the Edge-To-Edge feature to avoid shadows along  
the edges. Combine this feature with the Reduce/  
Enlarge feature to ensure that the entire page appears  
on the copies.  
Edge-To-Edge Output  
Auto Include Margins  
Off (default)  
On  
This feature automatically reduces the image size  
during scanning so the margins are included.  
20 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
 
Default Fax Options  
Administration > Default Job Options > Default Fax Options  
Table 2-5 Fax Send menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Resolution  
Standard (100x200dpi)  
(default)  
Set the resolution for sent documents. Higher  
resolution images have more dots per inch (dpi), so  
they show more detail. Lower resolution images have  
fewer dots per inch and show less detail, but the file  
size is smaller.  
Fine (200x200dpi)  
Superfine (300x300dpi)  
Prepend (default)  
Overlay  
Fax Header  
Select the position of the fax header on the page.  
Select Prepend to print the fax header above the fax  
content and move the fax content down on the page.  
Select Overlay to print the fax header over the top of  
the fax contents without moving the contents down.  
Using this option could prevent a single-page fax from  
flowing onto another page.  
Table 2-6 Fax Receive menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Fax Forwarding  
Fax Forwarding  
Off (default)  
Custom  
To forward received faxes to another fax device, select  
Fax Forwarding and Custom. Then type the number of  
the other fax device into the Fax Forwarding Number  
field. When you select this menu item for the first time,  
you are prompted to set up a PIN. Type that PIN every  
time you use this menu. This is the same PIN that is  
used to access the Fax Printing menu.  
Create PIN  
Stamp Received Faxes  
Fit to Page  
Enabled  
Add the date, time, senders phone number, and page  
number to each page of the faxes that this device  
receives.  
Disabled (default)  
Enabled (default)  
Disabled  
Shrink faxes that are larger than Letter-size or A4-size  
so that they can fit onto a Letter-size or A4-size page.  
If it this feature set to Disabled, faxes larger than Letter  
or A4 will flow across multiple pages.  
Fax Paper Tray  
Output Bin  
Select from the list of trays.  
The default setting is  
Automatic.  
Select the tray that holds the size and type of paper  
that you want to use for incoming faxes.  
<Binname>  
Select the default output bin, if applicable, to use for  
faxes.  
ENWW  
Default Job Options menu 21  
 
Default E-mail Options  
Administration > Default Job Options > Default E-mail Options  
Menu item  
Values  
Description  
Document File Type  
PDF (default)  
JPEG  
Select the file format for the e-mail.  
TIFF  
M-TIFF  
Output Quality  
Resolution  
High (large file)  
Medium (default)  
Low (small file)  
300 DPI  
Selecting higher quality for output increases the size of the  
output file.  
Select the resolution. Use a lower setting to create smaller  
files.  
200 DPI  
150 DPI (default)  
75 DPI  
Color/Black  
Color scan (default)  
Black/white scan  
TIFF 6.0 (default)  
TIFF (Post 6.0)  
Specify whether the e-mail will be in black or in color.  
TIFF Version  
Specify the TIFF version to use when saving scanned files.  
22 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
 
Default Send to Folder Options  
Administration > Default Job Options > Default Send To Folder Options  
Menu item  
Values  
Description  
Color/Black  
Color scan  
Specify whether the file will be in black or in color.  
Black/white scan (default)  
PDF (default)  
M-TIFF  
Document File Type  
Select the file format for the file.  
TIFF  
JPEG  
TIFF version  
TIFF 6.0 (default)  
TIFF (post 6.0)  
High (large file)  
Medium (default)  
Low (small file)  
75 DPI  
Specify the TIFF version to use when saving scanned files.  
Output Quality  
Selecting higher quality for output increases the size of the  
output file.  
Resolution  
Select the resolution. Use a lower setting to create smaller  
files.  
150 DPI (default)  
200 DPI  
300 DPI  
400 DPI  
600 DPI  
ENWW  
Default Job Options menu 23  
 
Default Print Options  
Administration > Default Job Options > Default Print Options  
Table 2-7 Default Print Options menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Copies Per Job  
Type a value.  
(List of supported sizes)  
Millimeters  
Set the default number of copies for print jobs.  
Select a paper size.  
Default Paper Size  
Default Custom Paper  
Size  
Unit of measure  
Configure the default paper size that is used when the  
user selects Custom as the paper size for a print job.  
Inches  
X Dimension  
Y Dimension  
Configure the width measurement for the Default  
Custom Paper Size.  
Configure the height measurement for the Default  
Custom Paper Size.  
Output Bin  
Print Sides  
<binname>  
Select the default output bin for print jobs. If optional  
trays are installed, output bin options vary.  
1-sided  
2-sided  
Select whether print jobs are single-sided or double-  
sided by default.  
24 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
 
Time/Scheduling menu  
Administration > Time/Scheduling  
Use this menu to set options for setting the time and for setting the device to enter and exit sleep mode.  
NOTE: Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.  
Table 2-8 Time/Scheduling menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Date/Time  
Date Format  
YYYY/MMM/DD  
(default)  
Use this feature to set the current date and  
time, and to set the date format and time  
format that are used to time-stamp outgoing  
faxes.  
MMM/DD/YYYY  
DD/MMM/YYYY  
Date  
Month  
Day  
Year  
Time Format  
Time  
12 hour (AM/PM)  
(default)  
24 hour  
Hour  
Minute  
AM  
PM  
Sleep Delay  
1 Minute  
Use this feature to select the time interval that  
the device should remain inactive before  
entering Sleep Mode.  
20 minutes  
30 minutes (default)  
45 minutes  
1 hour (60 minutes)  
90 minutes  
2 hours  
4 hours  
Wake Time  
Monday  
Tuesday  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
Friday  
Off (default)  
Custom  
Select Custom to set a wake time for each  
day of the week. The device exits sleep mode  
according to this schedule. Using a sleep  
schedule helps conserve energy and  
prepares the device for use so that users do  
not have to wait for it to warm up.  
Saturday  
Sunday  
ENWW  
Time/Scheduling menu 25  
       
Table 2-8 Time/Scheduling menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Monday  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Sleep Time  
Off (default)  
Custom  
Use this feature to set a sleep time for each  
day of the week for periods when the device  
will not likely be in use (for example, at a  
certain time each evening). Setting a sleep  
time makes the device automatically go into  
a low-power mode. Select a day and then  
select Custom to set up a custom sleep time  
schedule.  
Tuesday  
Wednesday  
Thursday  
Friday  
Saturday  
Sunday  
FAX Printing  
Create PIN  
If you have concerns about the security of  
private faxes, use this feature to store faxes  
rather than having them automatically print by  
creating a printing schedule. When you select  
this menu item for the first time, you are  
prompted to set up a PIN. Type that PIN every  
time you use this menu.  
26 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
 
Management menu  
Administration > Management  
Use this menu to set up global device-management options.  
NOTE: Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.  
Table 2-9 Management menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Display  
Values  
Description  
Network Address Button  
Use this feature to display the Network Address button  
on the Home screen.  
Hide (default)  
Stored Job Management Quick Copy Job Storage  
Limit  
Select the maximum  
number of jobs to store  
Use this menu to view and manage any jobs that are  
stored on the device.  
Quick Copy Job Held  
Timeout  
Off (default)  
1 Hour  
4 Hours  
1 Day  
1 Week  
Sleep mode  
Disable  
Use this feature to customize the sleep mode settings  
for this device.  
Use Sleep Delay (default)  
Select Use Sleep Delay to set the device to enter sleep  
mode after the delay that is specified in the Time/  
Scheduling menu.  
Manage Supplies  
Replace Supplies  
Stop at low  
This menu sets the product behavior for when a print  
cartridge, fuser kit, or transfer kit is low. Choose Stop  
at low to stop printing when a supply reaches a low  
condition. Choose Stop at out to allow the product to  
continue printing until a color print cartridge is empty.  
Stop at out (default)  
Override at out 1  
Override at out 2  
Choose Override at out 1 to allow the product to  
continue printing when the cartridges are empty or  
when the other supplies are worn out. The product  
stops printing when the toner collection units are full.  
Using this option could reduce print quality.  
Choose Override at out 2 to allow the product to keep  
printing when the cartridges are empty; when other  
supplies are worn out; and when the waste toner  
collection units are full. Using this option can damage  
the device.  
Supply Low/Order  
Threshold  
Select a value in the  
range. The default is 5%. management tasks such as changing the threshold  
when supplies should be ordered.  
Use this menu to carry out administrative supply  
Color Supply Out  
Stop (default)  
This menu sets the product behavior when a color  
supply is empty. When Auto-continue black is selected,  
the product will continue printing using black toner only.  
Auto-continue black  
ENWW  
Management menu 27  
       
Table 2-9 Management menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Restrict Color Use  
Color printing access  
Enable Color (default)  
Color If Allowed  
This item allows the administrator to disable or restrict  
color printing. To use the Color If Allowed setting, set  
up user permissions and/or application permissions in  
the embedded Web server or Web Jetadmin.  
Disable Color  
Color copying access  
Enable Color (default)  
Disable Color  
This item allows the administrator to disable or restrict  
color copying.  
Color/Black Mix  
Automatic (default)  
Mostly color pages  
Mostly black pages  
This item controls how the engine switches from color  
mode to monochrome mode for maximum  
performance and print cartridge life.  
Choose Automatic to reset the product to the factory  
default setting.  
Choose Mostly color pages if nearly all of your print  
jobs are color with high page coverage.  
Choose Mostly black pages if you print mostly  
monochrome jobs or a combination of color and  
monochrome jobs.  
28 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Initial Setup menu  
Administration > Initial Setup  
NOTE: Values shown with "(default)" are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.  
Networking and I/O  
Administration > Initial Setup > Networking and I/O  
Table 2-10 Networking and I/O  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
I/O Timeout  
Select a value in the  
I/O timeout refers to the elapsed time before a print job  
range. The factory default fails. If the stream of data that the device receives for  
setting is 15 seconds.  
a print job gets interrupted, this setting indicates how  
long the device will wait before it reports that the job  
has failed.  
Embedded Jetdirect  
See Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus on page 29 for the list of options.  
Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values and Description  
TCP/IP  
Enable  
Off: Disable the TCP/IP protocol.  
On (default): Enable the TCP/IP protocol.  
Host Name  
An alphanumeric string, up to 32 characters, used to  
identify the device. This name is listed on the  
HP Jetdirect configuration page. The default host name  
is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the  
LAN hardware (MAC) address.  
IPV4 Settings  
Config Method  
Specifies the method that TCP/IPv4 parameters will be  
configured on the HP Jetdirect print server.  
Bootp: Use BootP (Bootstrap Protocol) for automatic  
configuration from a BootP server.  
DHCP: Use DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration  
Protocol) for automatic configuration from a DHCPv4  
server. If selected and a DHCP lease exists, DHCP  
Release and DHCP Renew menus are available to set  
DHCP lease options.  
Auto IP: Use automatic link-local IPv4 addressing. An  
address in the form 169.254.x.x is assigned  
automatically.  
Manual: Use the Manual Settings menu to configure  
TCP/IPv4 parameters.  
ENWW  
Initial Setup menu 29  
         
Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values and Description  
Default IP  
Specify the IP address to default to when the print  
server is unable to obtain an IP address from the  
network during a forced TCP/IP reconfiguration (for  
example, when manually configured to use BootP or  
DHCP).  
Auto IP: A link-local IP address 169.254.x.x is set.  
Legacy: The address 192.0.0.192 is set, consistent  
with older HP Jetdirect devices.  
DHCP Release  
This menu appears if Config Method was set to  
DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists.  
No (default): The current DHCP lease is saved.  
Yes: The current DHCP lease and the leased IP  
address are released.  
DHCP Renew  
This menu appears if Config Method was set to  
DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists.  
No (default): The print server does not request to renew  
the DHCP lease.  
Yes: The print server requests to renew the current  
DHCP lease.  
Primary DNS  
Secondary DNS  
Enable  
Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Primary DNS  
Server.  
Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Secondary  
Domain Name System (DNS) Server.  
IPV6 Settings  
Use this item to enable or disable IPv6 operation on the  
print server.  
Off: IPv6 is disabled.  
On (default): IPv6 is enabled.  
Address  
Manual Settings: Use this item to manually set IPv6  
addresses on the print server.  
Enable: Select this item and choose On to enable  
manual configuration, or Off to disable manual  
configuration.  
Address: Use this item to type a 32 hexadecimal digit  
IPv6 node address that uses the colon hexadecimal  
syntax.  
DHCPV6 Policy  
Router Specified: The stateful auto-configuration  
method to be used by the print server is determined by  
a router. The router specifies whether the print server  
obtains its address, its configuration information, or  
both from a DHCPv6 server.  
Router Unavailable: If a router is not available, the print  
server should attempt to obtain its stateful  
configuration from a DHCPv6 server.  
Always: Whether or not a router is available, the print  
server always attempts to obtain its stateful  
configuration from a DHCPv6 server.  
30 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values and Description  
Primary DNS  
Use this item to specify an IPv6 address for a primary  
DNS server that the print server should use.  
Secondary DNS  
Use this item to specify an IPv6 address for a  
secondary DNS server that the print server should use.  
Proxy Server  
Specifies the proxy server to be used by embedded  
applications in the device. A proxy server is typically  
used by network clients for Internet access. It caches  
Web pages, and provides a degree of Internet security,  
for those clients.  
To specify a proxy server, enter its IPv4 address or  
fully-qualified domain name. The name can be up to  
255 octets.  
For some networks, you may need to contact your  
Independent Service Provider (ISP) for the proxy  
server address.  
Proxy Port  
Type the port number used by the proxy server for  
client support. The port number identifies the port  
reserved for proxy activity on your network, and can be  
a value from 0 to 65535.  
IPX/SPX  
Enable  
Off: Disable the IPX/SPX protocol.  
On (default): Enable the IPX/SPX protocol.  
Selects the frame-type setting for your network.  
Frame Type  
Auto: Automatically sets and limits the frame type to  
the first one detected.  
EN_8023, EN_II, EN_8022, and EN_SNAP: Frame-  
type selections for Ethernet networks.  
AppleTalk  
DLC/LLC  
Enable  
Enable  
Off: Disable the AppleTalk protocol.  
On (default): Enable the AppleTalk protocol.  
Off: Disable the DLC/LLC protocol.  
On (default): Enable the DLC/LLC protocol.  
ENWW  
Initial Setup menu 31  
     
Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values and Description  
Security  
Print Sec Page  
Yes (default): Prints a page that contains the current  
security settings on the HP Jetdirect print server.  
No: A security settings page is not printed.  
Secure Web  
For configuration management, specify whether the  
embedded Web server will accept communications  
using HTTPS (Secure HTTP) only, or both HTTP and  
HTTPS.  
HTTPS Required (default): For secure, encrypted  
communications, only HTTPS access is accepted. The  
print server will appear as a secure site.  
HTTP/HTTPS optional: Access using either HTTP or  
HTTPS is permitted.  
IPSEC  
Specify the Firewall status on the print server.  
Keep: Firewall status remains the same as currently  
configured.  
Disable: Firewall operation on the print server is  
disabled.  
Reset Security  
Specify whether the current security settings on the  
print server will be saved or reset to factory defaults.  
No: The current security settings are maintained.  
Yes: Security settings are reset to factory defaults.  
Diagnostics  
Embedded Tests  
This menu provides tests to help diagnose network  
hardware or TCP/IP network connection problems.  
Embedded tests help to identify whether a network fault  
is internal or external to the device. Use an embedded  
test to check hardware and communication paths on  
the print server. After you select and enable a test and  
set the execution time, you must select Execute to  
initiate the test.  
Depending on the execution time, a selected test runs  
continuously until either the device is turned off, or an  
error occurs and a diagnostic page is printed.  
LAN HW Test  
CAUTION: Running this embedded test will erase  
your TCP/IP configuration.  
This test performs an internal loopback test. An internal  
loopback test will send and receive packets only on the  
internal network hardware. There are no external  
transmissions on your network.  
Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.  
HTTP Test  
This test checks operation of HTTP by retrieving  
predefined pages from the device, and tests the  
embedded Web server.  
Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.  
32 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
   
Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values and Description  
SNMP Test  
This test checks operation of SNMP communications  
by accessing predefined SNMP objects on the device.  
Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.  
Data Path Test  
This test helps to identify data path and corruption  
problems on an HP postscript level 3 emulation device.  
It sends a predefined PS file to the device, However,  
the test is paperless; the file will not print.  
Select Yes to choose this test, or No to not choose it.  
Use this item to select all available embedded tests.  
Select All Tests  
Select Yes to choose all tests. Select No to select  
individual tests.  
Execution Time [H]  
Use this item to specify the length of time (in hours) that  
an embedded test will be run. You can select a value  
from 1 to 60 hours. If you select zero (0), the test runs  
indefinitely until an error occurs or device is turned off.  
Data gathered from the HTTP, SNMP, and Data Path  
tests is printed after the tests have completed.  
Execute  
No: Do not initiate the selected tests.  
Yes: Initiate the selected tests.  
Ping Test  
This test is used to check network communications.  
This test sends link-level packets to a remote network  
host, then waits for an appropriate response. To run a  
ping test, set the following items:  
Dest Type  
Specify whether the target device is an IPv4 or IPv6  
node.  
Dest IPv4  
Dest IPv6  
Packet Size  
Type the IPv4 address.  
Type the IPv6 address.  
Specify the size of each packet, in bytes, to be sent to  
the remote host. The minimum is 64 (default) and the  
maximum is 2048.  
Timeout  
Specify the length of time, in seconds, to wait for a  
response from the remote host. The default is 1 and  
the maximum is 100.  
Count  
Specify the number of ping test packets to send for this  
test. Select a value from 1 to 100. To configure the test  
to run continuously, select 0.  
Print Results  
If the ping test was not set for continuous operation,  
you can choose to print the test results. Select Yes to  
print results. If you select No (default), results are not  
printed.  
Execute  
Specify whether to initiate the ping test. Select Yes to  
initiate the test, or No to not run the test.  
ENWW  
Initial Setup menu 33  
Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values and Description  
Ping Results  
Use this item to view the ping test status and results  
using the control panel display. You can select the  
following items:  
Packets Sent  
Packets Received  
Percent Lost  
RTT Min  
Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) sent to the  
remote host since the most recent test was initiated or  
completed.  
Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) receivedfrom  
the remote host since the most recent test was initiated  
or completed.  
Shows the percent of ping test packets that were sent  
with no response from the remote host since the most  
recent test was initiated or completed.  
Shows the minimum detected roundtrip- time (RTT),  
from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission  
and response.  
RTT Max  
Shows the maximum detected roundtrip- time (RTT),  
from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission  
and response.  
RTT Average  
Ping In Progress  
Refresh  
Shows the average round-trip-time (RTT), from 0 to  
4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and  
response.  
Shows whether a ping test is in progress. Yes indicates  
a test in progress, and No indicates that a test  
completed or was not run.  
When viewing the ping test results, this item updates  
the ping test data with current results. Select Yes to  
update the data, or No to maintain the existing data.  
However, a refresh automatically occurs when the  
menu times out or you manually return to the main  
menu.  
34 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Table 2-11 Jetdirect menus (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values and Description  
Link Speed  
The link speed and communication mode of the print  
server must match the network. The available settings  
depend on the device and installed print server. Select  
one of the following link configuration settings:  
CAUTION: If you change the link setting, network  
communications with the print server and network  
device might be lost.  
Auto (default): The print server uses auto-negotiation  
to configure itself with the highest link speed and  
communication mode allowed. If auto-negotiation fails,  
either 100TX HALF or 10TX HALF is set depending on  
the detected link speed of the hub/switch port. (A  
1000T half-duplex selection is not supported.)  
10T Half: 10 Mbps, half-duplex operation.  
10T Full: 10 Mbps, Full-duplex operation.  
100TX Half: 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation.  
100TX Full: 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation.  
100TX Auto: Limits auto-negotiation to a maximum link  
speed of 100 Mbps.  
1000TX Full: 1000 Mbps, full-duplex operation.  
Print Protocols  
Use this item to print a page that lists the configuration  
of the following protocols: IPX/SPX, Novell NetWare,  
AppleTalk, DLC/LLC.  
ENWW  
Initial Setup menu 35  
   
Fax Setup  
Administration > Initial Setup > Fax Setup  
Table 2-12 Fax Setup menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Required Settings  
Country/Region  
Date/Time  
(Countries/regions  
listed)  
Configure the settings that are legally  
required for outgoing faxes.  
Date Format  
Date  
Time Format  
Time  
Fax Header  
Information  
Phone Number  
Company Name  
PC Fax Send  
Disabled  
Use this feature to enable or disable PC Fax  
Send. PC Fax Send enables users to send  
faxes through the device from their  
computers if they have the Send Fax driver  
installed on their PC.  
Enabled (default)  
36 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
 
Table 2-12 Fax Setup menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Off  
Description  
Fax Send Settings  
Fax Dial Volume  
Use this feature to set the volume of the tones  
that you hear while the device dials the fax  
number.  
Low (default)  
High  
Error Correction  
Mode  
Enabled (default)  
When Error Correction Mode is enabled and  
an error occurs during fax transmission, the  
device sends or receives the error portion  
again.  
Disabled  
JBIG Compression  
Enabled (default)  
Disabled  
JBIG compression reduces fax-transmission  
time, which can result in lower phone  
charges. However, using JBIG compression  
sometimes causes compatibility problems  
with older fax machines. If this occurs, turn off  
JBIG compression.  
Maximum Baud Rate  
Select a value from  
Use this feature to set the maximum baud  
the list. The default is rate for receiving faxes. This can be used as  
33.6K.  
a diagnostic tool for troubleshooting fax  
problems.  
TCF T.30 Delay  
Timer  
Default (default)  
Custom  
This setting should be left at the default value  
and only changed when directed by an HP  
technical support agent. Adjustment  
procedures associated with this setting are  
beyond the scope of this guide.  
TCF Extend  
Default (default)  
Custom  
This setting should be left at the default value  
and only changed when directed by an HP  
technical support agent. Adjustment  
procedures associated with this setting are  
beyond the scope of this guide.  
Dialing Mode  
Tone (default)  
Pulse  
Select whether the device should use tone or  
pulse dialing.  
Redial On Busy  
Redial On NoAnswer  
The range is between Type the number of times the device should  
0 and 9. The factory attempt to redial if the line is busy.  
default is 3 times.  
Never (default)  
Once  
Use this feature to specify the number of  
times the device should attempt to dial if the  
recipient fax number does not answer.  
Twice  
NOTE: Twice is available in locations other  
than the United States and Canada.  
ENWW  
Initial Setup menu 37  
Table 2-12 Fax Setup menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Redial Interval  
The range is between Use this feature to specify the number of  
1 and 5 minutes. The minutes between dialing attempts if the  
factory default is 5  
minutes.  
recipient number is busy or not answering.  
Detect Dial Tone  
Dialing Prefix  
Billing Codes  
Enabled  
Use this feature to specify whether the device  
should check for a dial tone before sending a  
fax.  
Disabled (default)  
Off (default)  
Custom  
Use this feature to specify a prefix number  
that must be dialed when sending faxes from  
the device.  
Off (default)  
Custom  
When billing codes are enabled, a prompt  
appears that asks the user to enter the billing  
code for an outgoing fax.  
The range is between 1 and 16 digits. The  
default is 1 digit.  
Fax Receive Settings Rings To Answer  
Ring Interval  
The range varies by Use this feature to specify the number of rings  
location. The factory that must occur before the fax modem  
default is 2 rings.  
Default (default)  
Custom  
answers.  
This setting is used to adjust for some PBX  
ring signals. Change this setting only when  
directed by an HP technical support agent.  
Ring Frequency  
Default (default)  
Custom  
This setting should be left at the default value  
and only changed when directed by an HP  
technical support agent. Adjustment  
procedures associated with this setting are  
beyond the scope of this guide.  
Ringer Volume  
Off  
Set the volume for the fax ring-tone.  
Low (default)  
High  
Blocked Fax  
Numbers  
Add Blocked  
Numbers  
Type the fax number Use this feature to add or delete numbers  
to add.  
from the blocked fax list. The blocked fax list  
can contain up to 30 numbers. When the  
device receives a call from one of the blocked  
fax numbers, it deletes the incoming fax. It  
also logs the blocked fax in the activity log  
along with job-accounting information.  
Remove Blocked  
Numbers  
Select a fax number  
to remove.  
Clear All Blocked  
Numbers  
No (default)  
Yes  
38 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
E-mail Setup  
Administration > Initial Setup > E-mail Setup  
Use this menu to enable the e-mail feature and to configure basic e-mail settings.  
NOTE: To configure advanced e-mail settings, use the embedded Web server. For more information,  
Table 2-13 E-mail Setup menu  
Menu item  
Values  
On (default)  
Off  
Description  
Address Validation  
This option enables the device to check e-mail syntax when you type  
an e-mail address. Valid e-mail addresses require the "@" sign and  
a ".".  
Find Send Gateways  
SMTP Gateway  
Search the network for SMTP gateways that the device can use to  
send e-mail.  
Enter a value.  
Specify the IP address of the SMTP gateway that is used to send e-  
mail from the device.  
Test Send Gateway  
Test the configured SMTP gateway to see if it is functional.  
Send Setup menu  
Administration > Initial Setup > Send Setup  
Table 2-14 Send Setup menu  
Menu item  
Values  
Description  
Fax Number Confirmation  
Disable (default)  
Enable  
When fax number confirmation is enabled, you are prompted to enter  
the fax number twice to verify that it has been typed correctly.  
ENWW  
Initial Setup menu 39  
   
Device Behavior menu  
Administration > Device Behavior  
Table 2-15 Device Behavior menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Language  
Select the language Select a different language for control-panel  
from the list.  
messages. When you select a new language,  
the keyboard layout might also change.  
Key Press Sound  
Inactivity Timeout  
On (default)  
Off  
Use this feature to specify whether you hear  
a sound when you touch the screen or press  
buttons on the control panel.  
Type a value  
Specify the amount of time that elapses  
between 10 and 300 between any activity on the control panel and  
seconds. The factory the device resetting to the default settings.  
default is 60  
seconds.  
Warning/Error  
Behavior  
Clearable Warnings  
Continuable Events  
On  
Set the amount of time that a clearable  
warning appears on the control panel.  
Job (default)  
Auto continue (10  
seconds) (default)  
Configure the device behavior when the  
device encounters certain errors.  
Touch OK to  
continue  
Jam Recovery  
Auto (default)  
Configure how the device handles pages that  
are lost during a jam.  
Off  
On  
40 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
 
Table 2-15 Device Behavior menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Tray Behavior  
Use Requested Tray  
Exclusively (default) Control how the device handles jobs that  
have specified a specific input tray.  
First  
Manually Feed  
Prompt  
Always (default)  
Unless Loaded  
Specify how a prompt should appear when  
the type or size for a job does not match the  
specified tray and the device pulls from the  
multipurpose tray instead.  
PS Defer Media  
Use Another Tray  
Size/Type Prompt  
Duplex Blank Pages  
Image Rotation  
Enabled (default)  
Disabled  
Select either the PostScript (PS) or HP  
paper-handling model.  
Enabled (default)  
Disabled  
Turn on or off the control-panel prompt to  
select another tray when the specified tray is  
empty.  
Display (default)  
Do not display  
Auto (default)  
Yes  
Control whether the tray configuration  
message appears whenever a tray is opened  
or closed.  
Control how the device handles two-sided  
jobs (duplexing).  
Left to Right  
Right to Left  
Alternate  
Image rotation allows users to put paper in  
the input tray using the same orientation  
regardless of whether there is a finisher  
installed.  
NOTE: The image rotation set in this menu  
will be applied any time a job does not  
request stapling or when the requested  
stapling could not be applied because of  
unsupported media or when the stapler is  
unavailable.  
Select Left to Right to rotate the image as if it  
were going to be bound on the left. This  
setting is appropriate for print jobs where  
reading from left to right is the cultural norm.  
This is the default setting.  
Select Right to Left to rotate the image as if it  
were going to be bound on the right. This  
setting is usually appropriate for print jobs  
where reading from right to left is the cultural  
norm.  
Select Alternate to use a different loading  
orientation that might work better with  
preprinted forms that are used on legacy  
products.  
ENWW  
Device Behavior menu 41  
Table 2-15 Device Behavior menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Multifunc Finisher  
or  
Operation Mode  
Mailbox  
This menu appears when the HP 3-bin  
Stapler/Stacker Accessory or the HP Booklet  
Maker/Finisher Accessory is attached.  
Stacker  
MBM-3 Bin Stapler  
Function Separator  
Allows you to set the default operation mode.  
Mailbox assigns a user or group of users to  
each output bin. Stacker treats all of the  
output bins as a single large bin. When one  
bin gets full, jobs are automatically routed to  
the next bin. Function Separator specifies a  
default bin for specific types of jobs such as  
faxes or copies (stapler/stacker only).  
Staples  
None  
Sets the default staple selection for  
documents sent to the device when no staple  
value is specified.  
One Left Angled  
One Right Angled  
Two Left  
Two Right  
Two Top  
Staples Out  
Stop  
Sets the default behavior when a job  
specifies stapling and the stapler is out of  
staples. Stop stops printing if the stapler runs  
out of staples. Continue allows a job to  
continue printing even when the device is out  
of staples.  
Continue  
Offset  
Off  
On  
Turns the job offset feature on or off. When  
job offset is on, each copy of a job is shifted  
to one side in the output bin in order to keep  
each copy separate from the others.  
A4/Letter Staple  
Normal  
Controls the speed of the print engine to  
prevent paper jams by using the stapler  
buffer.  
Alternate 1  
Alternate 2  
NOTE: The stapler buffer may or may not  
be used depending on the selected media  
type or on the sensed media type, if  
Autosense Mode is enabled.  
If the Normal setting is enabled, the engine  
speed will be normal by using the stapler  
buffer whenever possible.  
If the Alternate 1 setting is enabled, and the  
engine is in Autosense Mode, the engine  
slows down to prevent jams. If the product is  
NOT in Autosense Mode, the engine  
performs at normal speed, using the stapler  
buffer whenever possible.  
If the Alternate 2 setting is enabled, the  
engine always slows down to prevent jams,  
never using the stapler buffer.  
42 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Table 2-15 Device Behavior menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Fold LTR-R & A4 - R  
–4.0 mm  
–3.5 mm  
–3.0 mm  
–2.5 mm  
–2.0 mm  
–1.5 mm  
–1.0 mm  
–0.5 mm  
0.0 mm  
0.5 mm  
1.0 mm  
1.5 mm  
2.0 mm  
2.5 mm  
3.0 mm  
3.5 mm  
4.0 mm  
Adjusts the fold line for Letter and A4 size  
paper (booklet maker only).  
ENWW  
Device Behavior menu 43  
Table 2-15 Device Behavior menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Fold Legal & JISB4  
–4.0 mm  
–3.5 mm  
–3.0 mm  
–2.5 mm  
–2.0 mm  
–1.5 mm  
–1.0 mm  
–0.5 mm  
0.0 mm  
0.5 mm  
1.0 mm  
1.5 mm  
2.0 mm  
2.5 mm  
3.0 mm  
3.5 mm  
4.0 mm  
Adjusts the fold line for Legal and JIS B4 size  
paper (booklet maker only).  
44 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Table 2-15 Device Behavior menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Fold 11X17 & A3  
–4.0 mm  
–3.5 mm  
–3.0 mm  
–2.5 mm  
–2.0 mm  
–1.5 mm  
–1.0 mm  
–0.5 mm  
0.0 mm  
0.5 mm  
1.0 mm  
1.5 mm  
2.0 mm  
2.5 mm  
3.0 mm  
3.5 mm  
4.0 mm  
Adjusts the fold line for Legal and 11x17 and  
A3 size paper (booklet maker only).  
General Copy  
Behavior  
Scan Ahead  
Enabled (default)  
Disabled  
Turn on no-wait scanning. With Scan Ahead  
enabled, the pages in the original document  
are scanned to disk and held until the device  
becomes available.  
Auto Print Interrupt  
Enabled  
When this feature is enabled, copy jobs can  
interrupt print jobs that are set to print multiple  
copies.  
Disabled (default)  
The copy job is inserted into the print queue  
at the end of one copy of the print job. After  
the copy job is complete, the device  
continues printing the remaining copies of the  
print job.  
Copy Interrupt  
Enabled  
When this feature is enabled, a copy job that  
is currently printing can be interrupted when  
a new copy job is started. You are prompted  
to confirm that you want to interrupt the  
current job.  
Disabled (default)  
Alternative  
Letterhead Mode  
Off (default)  
On  
This option allows loading of letterhead or  
preprinted paper the same way for all copy  
jobs, whether copying to one side of the  
paper or to both sides of the paper.  
ENWW  
Device Behavior menu 45  
Table 2-15 Device Behavior menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
No  
Description  
General Printing  
Behavior  
Override A4/Letter  
When this feature is enabled, the job prints  
on letter-size paper when an A4 job is sent  
but no A4-size paper is loaded in the device  
(or prints on A4 paper when a letter-size job  
is sent but no letter-size paper is loaded).  
This option also overrides A3 with ledger-size  
paper and ledger with A3-size paper.  
Yes (default)  
Manual Feed  
Courier Font  
Wide A4  
Enabled  
When this feature is enabled, the user can  
select manual feed from the control panel as  
the paper source for a job.  
Disabled (default)  
Regular (default)  
Dark  
Select which version of the Courier font you  
want to use.  
Enabled  
Change the printable area of A4-size paper.  
If you enable this option, eighty 10-pitch  
characters can be printed on a single line of  
A4 paper.  
Disabled (default)  
Print PS Errors  
Print PDF Errors  
Personality  
Enabled  
Select whether a PostScript (PS) error page  
is printed when the device encounters a PS  
error.  
Disabled (default)  
Enabled  
Select whether a PDF error page is printed  
when the device encounters a PDF error.  
Disabled (default)  
Auto (default)  
PCL  
Select the printer language that the device  
should use.  
Normally, you should not change the  
language. If you change the setting to a  
specific language, the device does not  
automatically switch from one language to  
another unless specific software commands  
are sent to the device.  
PDF  
PS  
46 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Table 2-15 Device Behavior menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
PCL  
Form Length  
Type a value  
PCL is a set of printer commands that  
Hewlett-Packard developed to provide  
access to printer features.  
between 5 and 128  
lines. The factory  
default is 60 lines.  
Orientation  
Portrait (default)  
Landscape  
Select the orientation that is most often used  
for print jobs. Select Portrait if the short edge  
is at the top or Landscape if the long edge is  
at the top.  
Font Source  
Font Number  
Select the source  
from the list.  
Select the font source for the user-soft default  
font.  
Type the font  
Specify the font number for the user soft  
default font by using the source that is  
specified in the Font Source menu item. The  
device assigns a number to each font and  
lists it on the PCL font list (available from the  
Administration menu).  
number. The range  
is between 0 and  
999. The factory  
default is 0.  
Font Pitch  
Type a value  
If Font Source and Font Number indicate a  
contour font, use this feature to select a  
default pitch (for a fixed-spaced font).  
between 0.44 and  
99.99. The factory  
default is 10.00.  
Symbol Set  
PC-8 (default)  
Select any one of several available symbol  
sets from the control panel. A symbol set is a  
unique grouping of all the characters in a font.  
(50 additional  
symbol sets from  
which to choose)  
Append CR to LF  
No (default)  
Yes  
Configure whether a carriage return (CR) is  
appended to each line feed (LF) encountered  
in backwards-compatible PCL jobs (pure  
text, no job control).  
Suppress Blank  
Pages  
No (default)  
Yes  
This option is for users who are generating  
their own PCL, which could include extra  
form feeds that cause blank pages to be  
printed. When Yes is selected, form feeds are  
ignored if the page is blank.  
Media Source  
Mapping  
Standard (default)  
Classic  
Select and maintain input trays by number  
when you are not using the device driver, or  
when the software program has no option for  
tray selection.  
ENWW  
Device Behavior menu 47  
Print Quality menu  
Administration > Print Quality  
Table 2-16 Print Quality menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Adjust Color  
Highlights  
Cyan Density. Magenta  
Density. Yellow Density.  
Black Density  
Adjust the darkness or lightness of highlights on a  
printed page. Lower values represent lighter highlights  
on a printed page, and higher values represent darker  
highlights on a printed page.  
+5 to –5. Default is 0.  
Midtones  
Shadows  
Cyan Density. Magenta  
Density. Yellow Density.  
Black Density  
Adjust the darkness or lightness of midtones on a  
printed page. Lower values represent lighter midtones  
on a printed page, and higher values represent darker  
midtones on a printed page.  
+5 to –5. Default is 0.  
Cyan Density. Magenta  
Density. Yellow Density.  
Black Density  
Adjust the darkness or lightness of shadows on a  
printed page. Lower values represent lighter shadows  
on a printed page, and higher values represent darker  
shadows on a printed page.  
+5 to –5. Default is 0.  
Restore Color Values  
Test Page  
Sets all the density values back to the factory default  
settings.  
Set Registration  
Print  
Shift the margin alignment to center the image on the  
page from top to bottom and from left to right. You can  
also align the image on the front with the image printed  
on the back.  
Print a test page for setting the registration.  
Source  
All trays  
Select the source input tray for printing the Set  
Registration page.  
Tray <X>: <contents>  
(choose a tray)  
Adjust Tray <X>  
Shift from -20 to 20 along Perform the alignment procedure for each tray.  
the X or Y axes. 0 is the  
When it creates an image, the device scans across the  
page from side to side as the sheet feeds from top to  
bottom into the device.  
default.  
X1 Shift  
X2 Shift  
Y Shift  
The scan direction is referred to as X. X1 is the scan  
direction for the first side of a 2-sided page. X2 is the  
scan direction for the second side of a 2-sided page.  
The feed direction is referred to as Y.  
Print Modes  
<Paper Type>  
Configure which mode is associated with which paper  
type.  
48 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
 
Table 2-16 Print Quality menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Auto Sense Mode  
Tray 1 sensing  
Full Sensing (default for  
Tray 1)  
When Full Sensing is selected, the product recognizes  
light, plain, heavy, glossy, and tough paper and  
overhead transparencies. When Expanded Sensing is  
selected, the device recognizes normal paper,  
overhead transparencies, glossy paper, and tough  
paper. When Transparency Only is selected, the device  
recognizes only overhead transparency and non-  
overhead transparency types.  
Expanded Sensing  
(default for Trays 2-5)  
Transparency Only  
Tray 2-5 Sensing  
Expanded Sensing  
When Expanded Sensing is selected, the device  
recognizes normal paper, overhead transparencies,  
glossy paper, and tough paper. When Transparency  
Only is selected, the device recognizes only overhead  
transparency and non-overhead transparency types.  
Transparency Only  
(default)  
Optimize  
Paper Curl  
Pre-rotation  
Fuser Temp  
Normal  
To help reduce paper curl, set this option to Reduced.  
This decreases full speed to 10 PPM (instead of 40  
ppm) and 3/4 speed to 7.5 ppm (instead of 30 ppm).  
Reduced  
Off (default)  
On  
Turn this feature On if horizontal streaks appear on  
pages. Using this feature increases the warm-up time  
for the device.  
Normal (default)  
Alternate 1  
Alternate 2  
Alternate 3  
If you are seeing a faint image of the page repeated at  
the bottom of the page or on the following page, you  
should first make sure the Paper Type and Print Mode  
settings are correct for the type of paper you are using.  
If you continue to see ghost images on your print jobs,  
set the Fuser Temp feature to one of the Alternate  
settings . Try the Alternate 1 setting first and see if it  
solves the problem. If you continue to see the problem,  
try Alternate 2 and then Alternate 3. With the Alternate  
2 and Alternate 3 settings you may see an extra delay  
between jobs.  
Tray 1  
Normal (default)  
Alternate  
If you are seeing marks on the back side of the paper  
when printing from Tray 1, set the mode to Alternate.  
This increases the frequency of the cleaning cycle.  
Gloss Mode  
Normal (default)  
High  
Chosen when stable high gloss is required. Set this  
feature to High for glossy print jobs, such as photos, if  
you notice the gloss finish decreasing after the first  
page is printed. This setting reduces the performance  
for all paper types.  
ENWW  
Print Quality menu 49  
Table 2-16 Print Quality menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Auto (default)  
On  
Description  
Light Media  
Prevents the fuser from wrapping with light paper. Set  
this feature to On if you are frequently seeing Fuser  
Delay Jam or Fuser Wrap Jam messages, especially  
when printing on lightweight paper or on jobs with  
heavy toner coverage.  
Environment  
Normal (default)  
Low Temp  
Optimizes performance in extreme low temperature  
environments. Set this feature to Low Temp if the  
product is operating in a low-temperature environment  
and you are having problems with print quality such as  
blisters in the printed image.  
Line Voltage  
Normal (default)  
100V  
Optimizes performance in low-voltage conditions. Set  
this feature to 100V if the product is operating in a low-  
voltage environment and you are having problems with  
print quality such as blisters in the printed image.  
Cleaning frequency  
Normal (default)  
Alternate  
Set this feature to Alternate if you are seeing defects in  
the printed output that repeat at 38 mm (1.5 inch)  
intervals. This feature increases the frequency at which  
the C roller is cleaned. Setting this feature to  
Alternate might also reduce printing speed and  
increase the frequency of consumable replacement.  
D-Blade bias  
Normal (default)  
Alternate  
Set this feature to Alternate if you are seeing short white  
vertical lines in the printed output. The Alternate setting  
might also cause dark spots in the printed output, so be  
sure to test this setting on a few print jobs.  
Waste Bin  
Normal (default)  
Alternate  
Try setting this feature to Alternate if you are seeing  
lengthwise toner streaks in your printed output,  
especially in jobs with low toner coverage.  
Discharge Brush  
Off (default)  
On  
Enable this feature in low temperature and low humidity  
environments if you are seeing specks of toner  
scattered on double-sided jobs using light-weight paper  
and longer than ten pages.  
Background  
Off (default)  
On  
Turn this feature On if pages are printing with a shaded  
background. Using this feature might reduce gloss  
levels.  
Heavy Mode  
30 PPM (default)  
24 PPM  
The default setting is 30 PPM. Select the 24 PPM option  
to reduce the speed and improve fusing on heavy  
paper.  
Tracking Control  
Restore Optimize  
Off (default)  
On  
Improves color stability by adjusting the bias voltage.  
This setting should remain On.  
Select this setting to return all the settings in the  
Optimize menu to the factory default settings.  
Resolution  
Image REt 4800  
1200X600dpi  
Select Image REt 4800 to produces fast, high-quality  
printing that is appropriate for most print jobs  
Select 1200X600dpi to produce the highest-quality  
printing available, but it may slow print speed. This  
setting may be useful for jobs that contain very thin lines  
or fine graphics.  
Color REt  
Enabled (default)  
Disabled  
Enable or disable Resolution Enhancement technology  
(REt), which produces print output with smooth angles,  
curves, and edges.  
50 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Table 2-16 Print Quality menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Calibration/Cleaning  
Process Cleaning Page  
Process  
Use this feature to create and process a cleaning page  
for cleaning excess toner off the pressure roller in the  
fuser. The process takes up to 2.5 minutes.  
Quick Calibration  
Full Calibration  
Calibrate  
Calibrate  
No  
Performs partial product calibrations.  
Performs all product calibrations.  
Delay Calibration At  
Wake/Power On  
This menu controls the timing of the calibration when  
the printer wakes up or is turned on.  
Yes (default)  
Select No to have the printer calibrate immediately  
when it wakes up or is turned on. The device will  
not print any jobs until it finishes calibrating.  
Select Yes to enable a device that is asleep to  
accept print jobs before it calibrates. The device  
only accepts new jobs for a short time. It may start  
calibrating before it has printed all the jobs it has  
received.  
NOTE: For the best results, allow the device to  
calibrate before printing. Print jobs performed before  
calibration may not be of the highest quality.  
ENWW  
Print Quality menu 51  
Troubleshooting menu  
Administration > Troubleshooting  
NOTE: Many of the menu items under the Troubleshooting menu are for advanced troubleshooting  
purposes.  
Table 2-17 Troubleshooting menu  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Event Log  
Print  
This shows the event codes and their  
corresponding engine cycles on the control-  
panel display.  
Calibrate Scanner  
Calibrate  
Use this feature to compensate for offsets in  
the scanner imaging system (carriage head)  
for ADF and flatbed scans.  
You might need to calibrate the scanner if it  
is not capturing the correct sections of  
scanned documents.  
PQ Troubleshooting  
Fax T.30 Trace  
Print  
Print various diagnostic pages that help solve  
print-quality problems.  
Print T.30 Report  
Print or configure the fax T.30 trace report. T.  
30 is the standard that specifies  
When to Print Report  
Never auto print  
(default)  
handshaking, protocols, and error correction  
between fax machines.  
Print after any fax job  
Print after fax send  
jobs  
Print after any fax  
error  
Print after send  
errors only  
Print after receive  
errors only  
Fax Transmit Signal  
Loss  
A value between 0  
and 30. The default is signal loss. Do not modify this setting unless  
Set loss levels to compensate for phone-line  
0.  
requested to do so by an HP service  
representative because it could cause the fax  
to stop functioning.  
Fax V.34  
Normal (default)  
Off  
Disable V.34 mode if several fax failures have  
occurred or if phone line conditions require it.  
Fax Speaker Mode  
Diagnostic Page  
Normal (default)  
Diagnostic  
Print  
A technician can use this feature technician  
to evaluate and diagnose fax issues by  
listening to the sounds of fax modulations.  
Print a diagnostic page that includes color  
swatches and the EP parameters table.  
52 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
   
Table 2-17 Troubleshooting menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Disable Cartridge  
Check  
Use this item to enter a mode where a  
cartridge (or color pair of cartridge and drum)  
can be removed to determine which particular  
color is the source of a problem. In this mode,  
all consumable-related errors are ignored.  
Paper Path Sensors  
Paper Path Test  
Initiate a test of the paper-path sensors.  
Test Page  
Source  
Print  
Generate a test page for testing the paper-  
handling features. Define the path for the test  
in order to test specific paper paths.  
All trays  
Tray 1  
Tray 2  
Specify whether the test page is printed from  
all trays or from a specific tray.  
(Additional trays are  
shown, if applicable.)  
Destination  
Duplex  
All bins  
Select the output option for the test page.  
Send the test page to all output bins or only  
to a specific bin.  
Off (default)  
On  
Select whether the duplexer should be  
included in the test.  
Copies  
Range: 1-500,  
Default is 1.  
Select how many pages should be sent from  
the specified source as part of the test.  
ENWW  
Troubleshooting menu 53  
Table 2-17 Troubleshooting menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Finishing Paper Path Staples  
Test  
Finishing Options  
Choose from a list of Test the paper-handling features on the  
available options.  
finisher.  
Select the option that you want to test.  
Destination Bin  
Media Size  
Letter  
A4  
Select the paper size for the test.  
Select the paper type for the test.  
Media Type  
Copies  
Select from a list of  
types.  
Range: 2-30,  
Default=2  
Select the number of copies to include in the  
test.  
Duplex  
Off  
Select whether to use the duplexer in the test.  
On  
Test Page  
Print  
Print a test page to use for the test.  
Stack  
Destination Bin  
Select from a list of  
bins.  
Select the options that you want to use to test  
the stacker.  
Media Size  
Letter  
Legal  
A4  
Executive (JIS)  
8.5 x 13  
Media Type  
Copies  
Select from a list of  
bins.  
Select the type of media to use for the  
Finishing Paper Path Test.  
1
Select the number of copies to include in the  
Finishing Paper Path Test.  
10  
50  
100  
500  
Off  
On  
Print  
Duplex  
Select whether to use the duplexer in the  
Finishing Paper Path Test.  
Test Page  
Print a test page to use for the test.  
54 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Table 2-17 Troubleshooting menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Letter  
Description  
Booklet Maker  
Media Size  
Select the options that you want to use to test  
the booklet maker.  
Legal  
A4  
Executive (JIS)  
8.5 x 13  
Media Type  
Copies  
Select from a list of  
bins.  
Select the type of media to use for the  
Finishing Paper Path Test.  
1
Select the number of copies to include in the  
Finishing Paper Path Test.  
10  
50  
100  
500  
Off  
On  
Print  
Duplex  
Select whether to use the duplexer in the  
Finishing Paper Path Test.  
Test Page  
Print a test page to use for the test.  
Manual Sensor Test  
This item performs tests to determine  
whether the paper-path sensors are  
operating correctly.  
ENWW  
Troubleshooting menu 55  
Table 2-17 Troubleshooting menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Component Test  
Transfer Motors  
Belt Only  
Exercise individual parts independently to  
isolate noise, leaking, or other issues. To start  
the test, select one of the components. The  
test runs the number of times specified in the  
Repeat option. You might be prompted to  
remove parts from the device during the test.  
Press the Stop button to abort the test.  
Image Drum Motors  
Black Laser Scanner  
Cyan Laser Scanner  
Magenta Laser  
Scanner  
Yellow Laser  
Scanner  
Fuser Motor  
Fuser Pressure  
Release Motor  
Black Alienation  
Motor  
Cyan Alienation  
Motor  
Magenta Alienation  
Motor  
Yellow Alienation  
Motor  
ITB Contact/  
Alienation  
Tray 2 Pickup Motor  
Tray 2 Pickup  
Solenoid  
Tray 3 Pickup Motor  
Tray 3 Pickup  
Solenoid  
Tray 4 Pickup Motor  
Tray 4 Pickup  
Solenoid  
Tray 5 Pickup Motor  
Tray 5 Pickup  
Solenoid  
Duplexer Reverse  
Motor  
Duplexer Feed Motor  
Duplexer ReFeed  
Motor  
Paper Transport  
Motor  
56 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Table 2-17 Troubleshooting menu (continued)  
Menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Sub-menu item  
Values  
Description  
Repeat  
Once (Default)  
Continuous  
Determines the number of times the test runs.  
Print/Stop Test  
Continuous value  
from 0 to 60,000  
milliseconds.  
Default: 0  
Isolate faults by stopping the device during  
the print cycle and observing where in the  
process the image degrades. To run the test,  
specify a stop time. The next job that is sent  
to the device stops at the specified time in the  
process.  
Color Band Test  
Test Page  
Copies  
Print  
Prints a page that helps identify arcing in the  
high-voltage power supplies.  
Continuous value  
from 1 to 30.  
Specify the number of copies to print for the  
Color Band test  
Default: 1  
Scanner Tests  
Lower Lamp  
A service technician can use this menu item  
to diagnose potential problems with the  
device scanner.  
Sensors  
ADF Input Motor  
ADF Input Reverse  
Flatbed Motor  
ADF Read Motor  
ADF Read Motor  
Reverse  
ADF Duplex  
Solenoid  
ADF LED Indicator  
LEDs  
Control Panel  
Finisher Tests  
Verify that the components of the control  
panel are functioning correctly.  
Display  
Buttons  
Touchscreen  
Manual Sensor Test  
Component Test  
ENWW  
Troubleshooting menu 57  
Resets menu  
Administration > Resets  
Table 2-18 Resets menu  
Menu item  
Values  
Description  
Clear Local Address Book  
Clear Fax Activity Log  
Clear  
Use this feature to clear all addresses from the address books that  
are stored on the device.  
Yes  
Use this feature to clear all events from the Fax Activity Log.  
No (default)  
Restore Factory Telecom Setting Restore  
Use this option to restore the following settings to their factory default  
settings: Transmit Signal Loss, V34, Maximum Baud Rate, Speaker  
Mode.  
Restore Factory Settings  
Reset Supplies  
Restore  
Use this feature to restore all device settings to their factory defaults.  
New Document Feeder Kit (Yes/ Notify the device that a new document-feeder kit has been  
No) installed.  
58 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
       
Service menu  
Administration > Service  
The Service menu is locked and requires a PIN for access. This menu is intended for use by authorized  
service personnel.  
ENWW  
Service menu 59  
 
60 Chapter 2 Control panel  
ENWW  
Supported operating systems for Windows  
The product supports the following Windows operating systems:  
Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit)  
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)  
Windows Server 2008 (32-bit and 64-bit)  
Windows 2000  
Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit)  
62 Chapter 3 Software for Windows  
ENWW  
 
Supported printer drivers for Windows  
HP provides the following drivers for downloading:  
HP Universal Print Driver (UPD): Postscript, PCL 6, PCL 5  
Mac Driver  
Linux  
SAP  
UNIX Model Script  
Drivers for this product are available at www.hp.com/go/cljcm6049mfp_software or your country/region  
alternative.  
The printer drivers include online Help that has instructions for common printing tasks and also describes  
the buttons, checkboxes, and drop-down lists that are in the printer driver.  
NOTE: For more information about the UPD, see www.hp.com/go/upd.  
ENWW  
Supported printer drivers for Windows 63  
 
HP Universal Print Driver (UPD)  
The HP Universal Print Driver (UPD) for Windows is a single driver that gives you instant access to  
virtually any HP LaserJet product, from any location, without downloading separate drivers. It is built on  
proven HP print driver technology and has been tested thoroughly and used with many software  
programs. It is a powerful solution that performs consistently over time.  
The HP UPD communicates directly with each HP product, gathers configuration information, and then  
customizes the user interface to show the product’s unique, available features. It automatically enables  
features that are available for the product, such as two-sided printing and stapling, so you do not need  
to enable them manually.  
NOTE: For more information about the UPD, see www.hp.com/go/upd.  
UPD installation modes  
Traditional mode  
Use this mode if you are installing the driver for a single computer.  
When installed with this mode, UPD operates like traditional printer drivers.  
If you use this mode, you must install UPD separately for each computer.  
Dynamic mode  
Use this mode if you are installing the driver for a mobile computer, so you can  
discover and print to HP products in any location.  
Use this mode if you are installing UPD for a workgroup.  
To use this mode, download UPD from the Internet. See www.hp.com/go/  
upd, www.hp.com/go/cljcm6049mfp_software, or your country/region  
alternative.  
64 Chapter 3 Software for Windows  
ENWW  
   
Select the correct printer driver for Windows  
Printer drivers provide access to the product features and allow the computer to communicate with the  
product (using a printer language). Check the installation notes and readme files for additional software  
and languages.  
HP PCL 6 driver description  
Recommended for printing in all Windows environments  
Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and product-feature support for most users  
Developed to align with the Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for the best speed in Windows  
environments  
Might not be fully compatible with third-party and custom software programs that are based on  
PCL 5  
HP postscript emulation description  
Recommended for printing with Adobe® software programs or with other highly graphics-intensive  
software programs  
Provides support for printing from postscript level 3 emulation needs, or for postscript flash font  
support  
Performs slightly faster than the PCL 6 driver when using Adobe software programs  
HP PCL 5 description  
Recommended for general office printing in Windows environments  
Compatible with previous PCL versions and older HP LaserJet products  
The best choice for printing from third-party or custom software programs  
The best choice when operating with mixed environments, which require the product to be set to  
PCL 5 (UNIX, Linux, mainframe)  
Designed for use in corporate Windows environments to provide a single driver for use with multiple  
printer models  
Preferred when printing to multiple printer models from a mobile Windows computer  
ENWW  
Select the correct printer driver for Windows 65  
 
Priority for print settings  
Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made:  
NOTE: The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software program.  
Page Setup dialog box: Click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program  
you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed here override settings changed  
anywhere else.  
Print dialog box: Click Print, Print Setup, or a similar command on the File menu of the program  
you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed in the Print dialog box have a lower  
priority and do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box.  
Printer Properties dialog box (printer driver): Click Properties in the Print dialog box to open  
the printer driver. Settings changed in the Printer Properties dialog box do not override settings  
anywhere else in the printing software.  
Default printer driver settings: The default printer driver settings determine the settings used in  
all print jobs, unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties dialog  
boxes.  
Printer control panel settings: Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower priority  
than changes made anywhere else.  
66 Chapter 3 Software for Windows  
ENWW  
 
Change printer-driver settings for Windows  
Change the settings for all print jobs Change the default settings for all  
Change the product configuration  
until the software program is closed  
print jobs  
settings  
1. On the File menu in the software  
program, click Print.  
1. Windows XP, Windows Server  
2003, and Windows Server 2008  
(using the default Start menu  
view): Click Start, and then click  
Printers and Faxes.  
1. Windows XP, Windows Server  
2003, and Windows Server 2008  
(using the default Start menu  
view): Click Start, and then click  
Printers and Faxes.  
2. Select the driver, and then click  
Properties or Preferences.  
The steps can vary; this procedure is  
most common.  
-or-  
-or-  
Windows 2000, Windows XP,  
Windows Server 2003, and  
Windows Server 2008 (using the  
Classic Start menu view): Click  
Start, click Settings, and then click  
Printers.  
Windows 2000, Windows XP,  
Windows Server 2003, and  
Windows Server 2008 (using the  
Classic Start menu view): Click  
Start, click Settings, and then click  
Printers.  
-or-  
-or-  
Windows Vista: Click Start, click  
Control Panel, and then in the  
category for Hardware and  
Sound click Printer.  
Windows Vista: Click Start, click  
Control Panel, and then in the  
category for Hardware and  
Sound click Printer.  
2. Right-click the driver icon, and then 2. Right-click the driver icon, and then  
select Printing Preferences.  
select Properties.  
3. Click the Device Settings tab.  
ENWW  
Change printer-driver settings for Windows 67  
 
Supported utilities for Windows  
HP Web Jetadmin  
HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool for HP Jetdirect-connected printers within your  
intranet, and it should be be installed only on the network administrator’s computer.  
NOTE: HP Web Jetadmin 10.0 or later is required for full support of this product.  
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems,  
When installed on a host server, any client can gain access to HP Web Jetadmin by using a supported  
Web browser (such as Microsoft® Internet Explorer 4.x or Netscape Navigator 4.x or later) by navigating  
to the HP Web Jetadmin host.  
Embedded Web server  
The device is equipped with an embedded Web server, which provides access to information about  
device and network activities. This information appears in a Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet  
Explorer, Netscape Navigator, Apple Safari, or Firefox.  
The embedded Web server resides on the device. It is not loaded on a network server.  
The embedded Web server provides an interface to the device that anyone who has a network-  
connected computer and a standard Web browser can use. No special software is installed or  
configured, but you must have a supported Web browser on your computer. To gain access to the  
embedded Web server, type the IP address for the device in the address line of the browser. (To find  
the IP address, print a configuration page. For more information about printing a configuration page,  
For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the embedded Web server, see  
68 Chapter 3 Software for Windows  
ENWW  
         
Software for other operating systems  
OS  
Software  
UNIX  
For HP-UX and Solaris networks, go to www.hp.com/support/go/jetdirectunix_software to  
install model scripts using the HP Jetdirect printer installer (HPPI) for UNIX.  
For the latest model scripts, go to www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts.  
For information, go to www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.  
Linux  
ENWW  
Software for other operating systems 69  
     
70 Chapter 3 Software for Windows  
ENWW  
4 Use the product with Macintosh  
ENWW  
71  
 
Software for Macintosh  
Supported operating systems for Macintosh  
The device supports the following Macintosh operating systems:  
Mac OS X V10.3, V10.4, V10.5 and later  
NOTE: For Mac OS X V10.4 and later, PPC and Intel Core Processor Macs are supported.  
Supported printer drivers for Macintosh  
The HP installer provides PostScript® Printer Description (PPD) files, Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs),  
and the HP Printer Utility for use with Macintosh computers.  
The PPDs, in combination with the Apple PostScript printer drivers, provide access to device features.  
Use the Apple PostScript printer driver that comes with the computer.  
Remove software from Macintosh operating systems  
To remove the software from a Macintosh computer, drag the PPD files to the trash can.  
Priority for print settings for Macintosh  
Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made:  
NOTE: The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software program.  
Page Setup dialog box: Click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program  
you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed here might override settings changed  
anywhere else.  
Print dialog box: Click Print, Print Setup, or a similar command on the File menu of the program  
you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed in the Print dialog box have a lower  
priority and do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box.  
Default printer driver settings: The default printer driver settings determine the settings used in  
all print jobs, unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties dialog  
boxes.  
Printer control panel settings: Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower priority  
than changes made anywhere else.  
72 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh  
ENWW  
               
Change printer-driver settings for Macintosh  
Change the settings for all print jobs Change the default settings for all  
Change the product configuration  
settings  
until the software program is closed  
print jobs  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
Mac OS X V10.3 or Mac OS X V10.4  
2. Change the settings that you want 2. Change the settings that you want 1. From the Apple menu, click System  
on the various menus.  
on the various menus.  
Preferences and then Print &  
Fax.  
3. On the Presets menu, click Save  
as and type a name for the preset. 2. Click Printer Setup.  
These settings are saved in the  
3. Click the Installable Options  
Presets menu. To use the new settings,  
you must select the saved preset option  
every time you open a program and print.  
menu.  
Mac OS X V10.5  
1. From the Apple menu, click System  
Preferences and then Print &  
Fax.  
2. Click Options & Supplies.  
3. Click the Driver menu.  
4. Select the driver from the list, and  
configure the installed options.  
Software for Macintosh computers  
HP Printer Utility  
Use the HP Printer Utility to set up product features that are not available in the printer driver.  
You can use the HP Printer Utility when the product uses a universal serial bus (USB) cable or is  
connected to a TCP/IP-based network.  
Open the HP Printer Utility  
Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.3 and V10.4  
1. Open the Finder, click Applications, click Utilities, and then double-click Printer Setup Utility.  
2. Select the product that you want to configure, and then click Utility.  
Open the HP Printer Utility in Mac OS X V10.5  
From the Printer menu, click Printer Utility.  
-or-  
From the Print Queue, click the Utility icon.  
HP Printer Utility features  
The HP Printer Utility consists of pages that you open by clicking in the Configuration Settings list.  
The following table describes the tasks that you can perform from these pages.  
ENWW  
Software for Macintosh 73  
               
Item  
Description  
Configuration Page  
Supplies Status  
File Upload  
Prints a configuration page.  
Shows the device supplies status.  
Transfers files from the computer to the device.  
Upload Fonts  
Transfers font files from the computer to the device.  
Transfers updated firmware files from the computer to the device.  
Turns on the automatic two-sided printing mode.  
Firmware Update  
Duplex Mode  
Economode & Toner Density  
Resolution  
Turns on the Economode setting to conserve toner, or adjusts toner density.  
Changes the resolution settings, including the REt setting.  
Locks or unlocks storage products, such as a hard disk.  
Manages print jobs that are stored on the device hard disk.  
Changes the default tray settings.  
Lock Resources  
Stored Jobs  
Trays Configuration  
IP Settings  
Changes the device network settings and provides access to the embedded Web server.  
Bonjour Settings  
Provides the ability to turn on or off Bonjour support or change the device service name  
that is listed on a network.  
Additional Settings  
E-mail Alerts  
Provides access to the embedded Web server.  
Configures the device to send e-mail notices for certain events.  
Supported utilities for Macintosh  
Embedded Web server  
The device is equipped with an embedded Web server, which provides access to information about  
device and network activities. For more information, see Embedded Web server sections  
74 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh  
ENWW  
                           
Use features in the Macintosh printer driver  
Print  
Create and use printing presets in Macintosh  
Use printing presets to save the current printer driver settings for reuse.  
Create a printing preset  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Select the driver.  
3. Select the print settings.  
4. In the Presets box, click Save As..., and type a name for the preset.  
5. Click OK.  
Use printing presets  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Select the driver.  
3. In the Presets box, select the printing preset that you want to use.  
NOTE: To use printer-driver default settings, select Standard.  
Resize documents or print on a custom paper size  
You can scale a document to fit on a different size of paper.  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Open the Paper Handling menu.  
3. In the area for Destination Paper Size, select Scale to fit paper size, and then select the size  
from the drop-down list.  
4. If you want to use only paper that is smaller than the document, select Scale down only.  
Print a cover page  
You can print a separate cover page for your document that includes a message (such as “Confidential”).  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Select the driver.  
3. Open the Cover Page menu, and then select whether to print the cover page Before Document  
or After Document.  
4. In the Cover Page Type menu, select the message that you want to print on the cover page.  
NOTE: To print a blank cover page, select Standard as the Cover Page Type.  
ENWW  
Use features in the Macintosh printer driver 75  
               
Use watermarks  
A watermark is a notice, such as “Confidential,” that is printed in the background of each page of a  
document.  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Open the Watermarks menu.  
3. Next to Mode, select the type of watermark to use. Select Watermark to print a semi-transparent  
message. Select Overlay to print a message that is not transparent.  
4. Next to Pages, select whether to print the watermark on all pages or on the first page only.  
5. Next to Text, select one of the standard messages, or select Custom and type a new message in  
the box.  
6. Select options for the remaining settings.  
Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper in Macintosh  
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a cost-effective way  
to print draft pages.  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Select the driver.  
3. Open the Layout menu.  
4. Next to Pages per Sheet, select the number of pages that you want to print on each sheet (1, 2,  
4, 6, 9, or 16).  
5. Next to Layout Direction, select the order and placement of the pages on the sheet.  
6. Next to Borders, select the type of border to print around each page on the sheet.  
76 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh  
ENWW  
     
Print on both sides of the page (duplex printing)  
Use automatic duplex printing  
1. Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special  
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:  
For tray 1, load the letterhead paper face-up with the bottom edge feeding into the printer first.  
For all other trays, load the letterhead paper face-down with the top edge at the back of the  
tray.  
2. On the File menu, click Print.  
3. Open the Layout menu.  
4. Next to Two-Sided, select either Long-Edge Binding or Short-Edge Binding.  
5. Click Print.  
Print on both sides manually  
1. Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special  
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of the following ways:  
For tray 1, load the letterhead paper face-up with the bottom edge feeding into the printer first.  
For all other trays, load the letterhead paper face-down with the top edge at the back of the  
tray.  
CAUTION: To avoid jams, do not load paper that is heavier than 105 g/m2 (28-lb bond).  
2. On the File menu, click Print.  
3. On the Finishing menu, select Manually Print on 2nd Side.  
4. Click Print. Follow the instructions in the pop-up window that appears on the computer screen  
before replacing the output stack in tray 1 for printing the second half.  
5. Go to the printer, and remove any blank paper that is in tray 1.  
6. Insert the printed stack face-up with the bottom edge feeding into the printer first in tray 1. You  
must print the second side from tray 1.  
7. If prompted, press the appropriate control-panel button to continue.  
Set the stapling options  
If a finishing device that has a stapler is installed, you can staple documents.  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Open the Finishing menu.  
3. In the Stapling Options drop-down list, select the stapling option that you want to use.  
ENWW  
Use features in the Macintosh printer driver 77  
       
Store jobs  
You can store jobs on the product so you can print them at any time. You can share stored jobs with  
other users, or you can make them private.  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Open the Job Storage menu.  
3. In the Job Storage: drop-down list, select the type of stored job.  
4. For the Stored Job, Private Job, and Private Stored Job types of stored jobs, enter a name for  
the stored job in the box next to Job Name:.  
Select which option to use if another stored job already has that name.  
Use Job Name + (1 - 99) appends a unique number to the end of the job name.  
Replace Existing File overwrites the existing stored job with the new one.  
5. If you selected Stored Job or Private Job in step 3, type a 4-digit number in the box next to PIN  
To Print (0000 - 9999). When other people attempt to print this job, the product prompts them to  
enter this PIN number.  
Set the color options  
Use the Color Options pop-up menu to control how colors are interpreted and printed from software  
programs.  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.  
2. Select the driver.  
3. Open the Color Options pop-up menu.  
4. Click Show Advanced Options.  
5. Adjust the individual settings for text, graphics, and photographs.  
Use the Services menu  
If the product is connected to a network, use the Services menu to obtain product and supply-status  
information.  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Open the Services menu.  
78 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh  
ENWW  
         
3. To open the embedded Web server and perform a maintenance task, do the following:  
a. Select Device Maintenance.  
b. Select a task from the drop-down list.  
c. Click Launch.  
4. To go to various support Web sites for this device, do the following:  
a. Select Services on the Web.  
b. Select Internet Services, and select an option from the drop-down list.  
c. Click Go!.  
ENWW  
Use features in the Macintosh printer driver 79  
80 Chapter 4 Use the product with Macintosh  
ENWW  
5 Connect the product  
ENWW  
81  
 
USB connection  
This product supports one USB 2.0 device connection. The USB port is located on the back of the  
product. You must use an A-to-B type USB cable that is no longer than 2 meters (6.56 feet). The USB  
2.0 port can be used to connect directly to the product and to upgrade firmware.  
Figure 5-1 USB connection  
1
USB 2.0 port  
82 Chapter 5 Connect the product  
ENWW  
 
Network connection  
All product models include an embedded HP Jetdirect print server, which supports connection to a  
network using the local area network (LAN) connector (RJ-45) on the back of the product. For more  
information about configuring the product on a network see Network configuration on page 85  
Figure 5-2 Network connection  
1
2
Network cable  
Network port  
ENWW  
Network connection 83  
 
84 Chapter 5 Connect the product  
ENWW  
Benefits of a network connection  
Connecting the product to a network provides a number of benefits:  
All network users can share the same product.  
You can manage the product remotely, from any computer on the network, by using the embedded  
Web server (EWS).  
For large enterprise businesses, you can also manage the product remotely by using HP Web  
Jetadmin.  
86 Chapter 6 Network configuration  
ENWW  
 
Supported network protocols  
The product supports the TCP/IP network protocol, the most widely used and accepted networking  
protocol. Many networking services utilize this protocol. For more information, see TCP/IP  
on page 88. The following table lists the supported networking services and protocols.  
Table 6-1 Printing  
Service name  
Description  
port9100 (Direct Mode)  
Printing service  
Printing service  
Line printer daemon (LPD)  
Table 6-2 Network device discovery  
Service name  
Description  
SLP (Service Location Protocol)  
Bonjour  
Device-discovery protocol, used to help find and configure  
network devices. Used primarily by Microsoft-based programs.  
Device-discovery protocol, used to help find and configure  
network devices. Used primarily by Apple Macintosh-based  
programs.  
Table 6-3 Messaging and management  
Service name  
Description  
HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer Protocol)  
Allows Web browsers to communicate with embedded Web  
server.  
EWS (embedded Web server)  
Allows a user to manage the product through a Web browser.  
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)  
Used by network applications for product management. SNMP  
v1 and standard MIB-II (Management Information Base)  
objects are supported.  
Table 6-4 IP addressing  
Service name  
Description  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)  
For automatic IP address assignment. The DHCP server  
provides the product with an IP address. Generally, no user  
intervention is required for the product to obtain an IP address  
from a DHCP server.  
BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol)  
For automatic IP address assignment. The BOOTP server  
provides the product with an IP address. Requires the  
administrator to input a product's MAC hardware address on  
the BOOTP server for the product to obtain an IP address from  
that server.  
Auto IP  
For automatic IP address assignment. If neither a DHCP  
server nor a BOOTP server is present, the product uses this  
service to generate a unique IP address.  
ENWW  
Supported network protocols 87  
     
Configuring network settings  
You might need to configure certain network parameters on the product. You can configure these  
parameters from the installation software, the product control panel, the embedded Web server, or  
management software, such as HP Web Jetadmin.  
For more information about supported networks and network configuration tools, see the HP Jetdirect  
Print Servers Administrator’s Guide. The guide comes with printers in which an HP Jetdirect print server  
is installed.  
TCP/IP  
Similar to a common language that people use to communicate with each other, TCP/IP (Transmission  
Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and  
other devices communicate with each other over a network.  
Internet Protocol (IP)  
When information is sent across the network, the data is broken down into small packets. Each packet  
is sent independently. Each packet is encoded with IP information, such as the IP address of the sender  
and receiver. IP packets can be routed over routers and gateways: devices that connect a network with  
other networks.  
IP communications require no connection. When IP packets are sent, they might not arrive at their  
destination in the correct sequence. However, higher-level protocols and programs place the packets  
in the correct sequence, so IP communications are efficient.  
Each node or device that communicates on the network requires an IP address.  
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)  
TCP breaks the data into packets and recombines them on the receiving end by providing a connection-  
oriented, reliable, and guaranteed delivery service to another node on the network. When data packets  
are received at their destination, TCP calculates a checksum for each packet to verify that the data is  
not corrupt. If the data in the packet has been corrupted during transmission, TCP discards the packet  
and requests that the packet be resent.  
IP address  
Every host (workstation or node) on an IP network requires a unique IP address for each network  
interface. This address is used to identify both the network and specific hosts that are located on that  
network. It is possible for a host to query a server for a dynamic IP address each time the product boots  
up (for example, using DHCP and BOOTP).  
An IP address contains four bytes of information, divided into sections that each contain one byte. The  
IP address has the following format:  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
CAUTION: When assigning IP addresses, always consult the IP address administrator. Setting the  
wrong address can disable other equipment operating on the network or interfere with communications.  
Configure IP parameters  
TCP/IP configuration parameters can be configured manually, or they can be automatically downloaded  
by using DHCP or BOOTP each time the product is turned on.  
88 Chapter 6 Network configuration  
ENWW  
                     
When turned on, a new product that is unable to retrieve a valid IP address from the network  
automatically assigns itself a default IP address. The IP address for the product is listed on the product  
Configuration page and the Network report. See Information pages on page 176.  
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)  
DHCP allows a group of devices to use a set of IP addresses that are maintained by a DHCP server.  
The product sends a request to the server, and if an IP address is available, the server assigns it to that  
product.  
BOOTP  
BOOTP is a bootstrap protocol used to download configuration parameters and host information from  
a network server.  
The client broadcasts a boot request packet that contains the product hardware address. The server  
answers with a boot reply packet that contains the information that the product needs for configuration.  
Subnets  
When an IP network address for a particular network class is assigned to an organization, no provision  
is made for more than one network being present at that location. Local network administrators use  
subnets to partition a network into several different subnetworks. Splitting a network into subnets can  
result in better performance and improved use of limited network address space.  
Subnet mask  
The subnet mask is a mechanism used to divide a single IP network into several different subnetworks.  
For a given network class, a portion of an IP address that would normally be used to identify a node is  
used, instead, to identify a subnetwork. A subnet mask is applied to each IP address to specify the  
portion used for subnetworks, and the portion used to identify the node.  
Gateways  
Gateways (routers) are used to connect networks together. Gateways are devices that act as translators  
between systems that do not use the same communication protocols, data formatting, structures,  
languages, or architectures. Gateways repackage the data packets and change the syntax to match  
that of the destination system. When networks are divided into subnets, gateways are required to  
connect one subnet to another.  
Default gateway  
The default gateway is the IP address of the gateway or router that moves packets between networks.  
If multiple gateways or routers exist, then the default gateway is typically the address of the first, or  
nearest, gateway or router. If no gateways or routers exist, then the default gateway will typically assume  
the IP address of the network node (such as the workstation or product).  
ENWW  
Configuring network settings 89  
                     
Configure TCP/IPv4 parameters  
If your network doesn't provide automatic IP addressing through DHCP, BOOTP, RARP, or another  
method, you might need to enter the following parameters manually before you can print over the  
network:  
IP address (4 bytes)  
Subnet mask (4 bytes)  
Default gateway (4 bytes)  
Input or change the IP address  
You can view the current IP address of the device from the control-panel Home screen by touching  
Network Address.  
Use the following procedure to change the IP address manually.  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Scroll to and touch Initial Setup.  
3. Touch Networking and I/O.  
4. Touch Embedded Jetdirect.  
5. Touch TCP/IP.  
6. Touch IPV4 Settings.  
7. Touch Config Method.  
8. Touch Manual.  
9. Touch Save.  
10. Touch Manual Settings.  
11. Touch IP Address.  
12. Touch the IP Address text box.  
13. Use the touchscreen keypad to type the IP address.  
14. Touch OK.  
15. Touch Save.  
Set the subnet mask  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Scroll to and touch Initial Setup.  
3. Touch Networking and I/O.  
4. Touch Embedded Jetdirect.  
5. Touch TCP/IP.  
90 Chapter 6 Network configuration  
ENWW  
         
6. Touch IPV4 Settings.  
7. Touch Config Method.  
8. Touch Manual.  
9. Touch Save.  
10. Touch Manual Settings.  
11. Touch Subnet Mask.  
12. Touch the Subnet Mask text box.  
13. Use the touchscreen keypad to type the subnet mask.  
14. Touch OK.  
15. Touch Save.  
Set the default gateway  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Scroll to and touch Initial Setup.  
3. Touch Networking and I/O.  
4. Touch Embedded Jetdirect.  
5. Touch TCP/IP.  
6. Touch IPV4 Settings.  
7. Touch Config Method.  
8. Touch Manual.  
9. Touch Save.  
10. Touch Manual Settings.  
11. Touch Default Gateway.  
12. Touch the Default Gateway text box.  
13. Use the touchscreen keyboard to type the default gateway.  
14. Touch OK.  
15. Touch Save.  
Configure TCP/IPv6 parameters  
For information about configuring the device for a TCP/IPv6 network, see the HP Jetdirect Print Servers  
Administrator's Guide.  
ENWW  
Configuring network settings 91  
       
Network utilities  
The product can be used with several utilities that make it easy to monitor and manage the product on  
a network.  
HP Web Jetadmin: See HP Web Jetadmin on page 68.  
Embedded Web server: See Embedded Web server on page 68.  
Other components and utilities  
Windows  
Macintosh OS  
The HP Printer Utility — change device settings, view  
Software installer — automates the printing system  
installation  
status, and set up printer-event notification from a Mac.  
This utility is supported for Mac OS X V10.3 and later.  
Online Web registration  
92 Chapter 6 Network configuration  
ENWW  
     
Understand paper and print media use  
This product supports a variety of paper and other print media in accordance with the guidelines in this  
user guide. Paper or print media that does not meet these guidelines might cause the following problems:  
Poor print quality  
Increased jams  
Premature wear on the product, requiring repair  
For best results, use only HP-brand paper and print media designed for laserjets or multiuse. Do not  
use paper or print media made for inkjet printers. Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the  
use of other brands of media because HP cannot control their quality.  
It is possible for paper to meet all of the guidelines in this user guide and still not produce satisfactory  
results. This might be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and/or humidity levels,  
or other variables over which Hewlett-Packard has no control.  
CAUTION: Using paper or print media that does not meet Hewlett-Packard's specifications might  
cause problems for the product, requiring repair. This repair is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard  
warranty or service agreements.  
94 Chapter 7 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
 
Supported paper and print media sizes  
NOTE: To obtain best print results, select the appropriate paper size and type in your print driver before  
printing.  
Table 7-1 Supported paper and print media sizes  
Size  
Dimensions  
Tray 1  
Tray 2  
Trays 3, 4, 5  
Letter  
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in)  
Letter Rotated 279 x 216 mm (11 x 8.5 in)  
Legal  
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)  
A4  
210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 in)  
297 x 210 mm (11.69 x 8.27 in)  
184 x 267 mm (7.24 x 10.51 in)  
139.7 x 215.9 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in)  
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in)  
A4 Rotated  
Executive  
Statement  
8.5 x 13  
A3  
297 x 420 mm (11.69 x 16.54 in)  
148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 in)  
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 in)  
279 x 432 mm (11 x 17 in)  
A5  
A6  
11 x 17  
12 x 18  
B4 (JIS)  
RA3  
305 x 457 mm (12 x 18 in)  
257 x 364 mm (10.12 x 14.33 in)  
305 x 430 mm (12 x 16.93 in)  
320 x 450 mm (12.6 x 17.7 in)  
182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 in)  
270 x 390 mm (10.63 x 15.35 in)  
195 x 270 mm (7.68 x 10.63 in)  
SRA3  
B5 (JIS)  
8k  
16k  
Custom  
98.55 x 139.70 mm to 320 x 457.2 mm  
(3.9 x 5.5 to 12.6 x 18 in)3  
Custom  
Custom  
148 x 210 mm to 297 x 432 mm (5.8 x 8.2 to  
11.7 x 17 in)2  
148 x 210 mm to 320 x 457.2 mm (5.8 x 8.2 to  
12.6 x 18 in)  
1
2
3
Tray automatically detects paper size.  
Standard sizes within the custom range for Tray 2 are: 8.5 x 13, RA4, SRA4, 8K (270 x 390), 16K (195 x 270)  
Standard sizes within the custom range for Trays 3, 4, and 5 are: 8.5 x 13, RA4, SRA4, 8K (270 x 390), 16K (195 x 270), RA3,  
SRA3 , and 12 x 18  
Table 7-2 Supported envelopes and postcards  
Size  
Dimensions  
Tray 1  
Trays 2, 3, 4, 5  
Envelope #9  
98 x 225 mm (3.88 x 8.88 in)  
ENWW  
Supported paper and print media sizes 95  
       
Table 7-2 Supported envelopes and postcards (continued)  
Size  
Dimensions  
Tray 1  
Trays 2, 3, 4, 5  
Envelope #10  
Envelope DL  
Envelope C5  
Envelope B5  
Envelope C6  
105 x 241 mm (4.13 x 9.49 in)  
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 in)  
162 x 229 mm (6.93 x 9.84 in)  
176 x 250 mm (6.7 x 9.8 in)  
162 x 114 mm (6.4 x 4.5 in)  
98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 in)  
Envelope  
Monarch  
Double Post Card 148 x 200 mm (5.83 x 7.87 in)  
US Index Cards  
102 x 152 mm (4 x 6 in) and 127 x 203 mm (5 x 8 in)  
1
Weights greater than 160 g/m2 may not perform well, but will not harm the product.  
The following paper sizes are supported with the optional HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker and HP Booklet  
Maker/Finisher accessories.  
Table 7-3 Supported paper and print media sizes for the optional HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker and HP Booklet Maker/  
Finisher accessories  
Size  
Dimensions  
Stacking2  
Angled  
Angled  
Two staples Folding  
Saddle stitch  
staple (left-  
angled)  
staple (right- (top or side)  
angled)  
Letter  
216 x 279 mm  
(8.5 x 11 in)  
Letter Rotated 279 x 216 mm  
(11 x 8.5 in)  
Legal  
216 x 356 mm  
(8.5 x 14 in)  
A4  
210 x 297 mm  
(8.27 x 11.69 in)  
A4 Rotated  
Executive  
8.5 x 13  
A3  
297 x 210 mm  
(11.69 x 8.27 in)  
184 x 267 mm  
(7.24 x 10.51 in)  
216 x 330 mm  
(8.5 x 13 in)  
297 x 420 mm  
(11.69 x 16.54 in)  
A5  
148 x 210 mm  
(5.83 x 8.27 in)  
A6  
105 x 148 mm  
(4.13 x 5.83 in)  
Statement  
140 x 216 mm  
(5.5 x 8.5 in)  
11 x 17  
(Ledger)  
279 x 432 mm  
(11 x 17 in)  
96 Chapter 7 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
Table 7-3 Supported paper and print media sizes for the optional HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker and HP Booklet Maker/  
Finisher accessories (continued)  
Size  
Dimensions  
Stacking2  
Angled  
Angled  
Two staples Folding  
Saddle stitch  
staple (left-  
angled)  
staple (right- (top or side)  
angled)  
12 x 18  
305 x 457 mm  
(12 x 18 in)  
B4 (JIS)  
257 x 364 mm  
(10.12 x 14.33 in)  
RA3  
305 x 430 mm  
(12 x 16.93 in)  
SRA3  
320 x 450 mm  
(12.6 x 17.7 in)  
B5 (JIS)  
257 x 182 mm  
(10.12 x 7.17 in)  
B6 (JIS)  
128 x 182 mm  
(5.04 x 7.2 in)  
8K  
270 x 390 mm  
(10.63 x 15.35 in)  
16K  
195 x 270 mm  
(7.68 x 10.63 in)  
Envelope 9#  
Envelope 10#  
Envelope DL  
Envelope C5  
Envelope B5  
Envelope C6  
98.4 x 225.4 mm  
(3.88 x 8.88 in)  
104.77 x 241.3 mm  
(4.12 x 9.5 in)  
110 x 220 mm  
(4.33 x 8.66 in)  
162 x 229 mm  
(6.38 x 9.02 in)  
176 x 250 mm  
(6.93 x 9.84 in)  
114 x 162 mm  
(4.49 x 6.38 in)  
Envelope  
Monarch  
98.42 x 190.5 mm  
(3.88 x 7.5 in)  
Double Post  
Card  
148 x 200 mm  
(5.83 x 7.87 in)  
4 x 6 Index  
Card  
102 x 152 mm (4 x 6 in)  
5 x 8 Index  
Card  
127 x 203 mm (5 x 8 in)  
Custom Size  
98.55 x 139.70 mm to  
320 x 457.2 mm  
(3.9 x 5.5 to  
12.6 x 18 in)  
1
2
Booklet maker only  
Stacking uses bins 1, 2, and 3 in the stapler/stacker, or bins 1 and 2 in the booklet maker.  
ENWW  
Supported paper and print media sizes 97  
   
Supported paper types  
Table 7-4 Tray 1 paper information  
Type  
Specifications  
Quantity  
Driver settings  
Paper orientation  
Paper and cardstock,  
standard sizes  
Range:  
Maximum stack height: Plain or unspecified  
10 mm (0.6 in)  
Load preprinted or  
prepunched paper  
facing down, with the  
top edge leading into  
the tray, or toward the  
back of the product  
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to  
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond  
Equivalent to 100  
sheets of 75 g/m2 (20  
lb) bond.  
Less than 60 g/m2 (16  
lb) bond to 90 g/m2 (24  
lb) bond  
Envelopes  
Up to 10 envelopes  
Envelope  
Short edge leading,  
flap toward the front of  
the product, facing up  
Labels  
Maximum 0.23 mm  
(0.009 in) thick  
Maximum stack height: Labels  
10 mm (0.6 in)  
Side to be printed on  
facing down  
Transparencies  
Heavy  
Minimum 0.13 mm  
(0.005 in) thick  
Maximum stack height: Transparencies  
10 mm (0.6 in)  
Side to be printed on  
facing down  
0.13 mm (0.005 in)  
thick  
Maximum stack height: Light glossy, glossy, or Side to be printed on  
10 mm (0.6 in) heavy glossy facing down  
Glossy  
Range:  
Maximum stack height: Light glossy, glossy, or Side to be printed on  
10 mm (0.6 in)  
heavy glossy  
facing down  
75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond to  
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond  
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to  
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond  
Photo media  
Cut sheet paper  
Tough paper  
Maximum stack height:  
10 mm (0.6 in)  
Side to be printed on  
facing down  
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to  
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond  
Maximum stack height:  
10 mm (0.6 in)  
Side to be printed on  
facing down  
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to  
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond  
Maximum stack height:  
10 mm (0.6 in)  
Side to be printed on  
facing down  
Table 7-5 Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 paper information  
Type  
Specifications  
Quantity  
Settings  
Paper orientation  
500 sheets of 75 g/m2  
(20 lb) bond.  
Paper and cardstock,  
standard sizes  
Range:  
Plain or unspecified  
Load preprinted or  
prepunched paper  
facing up, with the top  
toward the back of the  
tray or toward the right-  
hand side of the tray.  
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to  
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond  
Labels  
Maximum 0.13 mm  
(0.005 in) thick  
Maximum stack height: Labels  
54 mm (2.1 in)  
Side to be printed on  
facing up  
Transparencies  
Heavy  
Minimum 0.13 mm  
(0.005 in) thick  
Maximum stack height: Transparencies  
54 mm (2.1 in)  
Side to be printed on  
facing up  
0.13 mm (0.005 in) thick Maximum stack height: Light glossy, glossy, or Side to be printed on  
54 mm (2.1 in) heavy glossy facing up  
75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond to  
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond  
Glossy  
Maximum stack height: Light glossy, glossy, or Side to be printed on  
54 mm (2.1 in) heavy glossy facing up  
98 Chapter 7 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
 
Table 7-5 Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 paper information (continued)  
Type  
Specifications  
Quantity  
Settings  
Paper orientation  
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to  
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond  
Photo media  
Maximum stack height: Light glossy, glossy, or Side to be printed on  
54 mm (2.1 in)  
heavy glossy  
facing up  
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to  
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond  
Cut sheet paper  
Tough paper  
Maximum stack height: Plain or unspecified  
54 mm (2.1 in)  
Side to be printed on  
facing up  
60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to  
220 g/m2 (58 lb) bond  
Maximum stack height: HP Tough Paper  
54 mm (2.1 in)  
Side to be printed on  
facing up  
Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 capacity: 54 mm (2.126 in) height or 500 sheets of paper, whichever is less.  
Supported media types include: Cut sheet paper, labels, OHT, glossy paper, glossy film, photo media,  
and tough paper. Basis Weight: 60-220 g/m2 (16-58 lb).  
Duplex printing: Provides automatic two-sided printing (printing on both sides of the paper). The paper  
size range for automatic duplex printing is 175 to 320 mm (7.2 to 12.6 in) x 210 to 457 mm (8.3 to 18  
in). The media weight range is 60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb)  
NOTE: HP Color Laser Presentation Paper, Glossy (Q2546A) is not supported with this product. Using  
this type of paper can cause a fuser jam that might require the replacement of the fuser. Two  
recommended alternatives are HP Color LaserJet Presentation Paper, Soft Gloss (Q6541A) and HP  
Color LaserJet Brochure Paper, Glossy (Q6611A, Q6610A).  
NOTE: For a complete list of specific HP-brand paper that this product supports, go to www.hp.com/  
ENWW  
Supported paper types 99  
Special paper or print media guidelines  
This product supports printing on special media. Use the following guidelines to obtain satisfactory  
results. When using special paper or print media, be sure to set the type and size in your print driver to  
obtain the best print results.  
CAUTION: HP LaserJet printers use fusers to bond dry toner particles to the paper in very precise  
dots. HP laser paper is designed to withstand this extreme heat. Using inkjet paper not designed for this  
technology could damage your printer.  
Media type  
Do  
Do not  
Envelopes  
Store envelopes flat.  
Do not use envelopes that are  
wrinkled, nicked, stuck together, or  
otherwise damaged.  
Use envelopes where the seam  
extends all the way to the corner of  
the envelope.  
Do not use envelopes that have  
clasps, snaps, windows, or coated  
linings.  
Use peel-off adhesive strips that  
are approved for use in laser  
printers.  
Do not use self-stick adhesives or  
other synthetic materials.  
Labels  
Use only labels that have no  
exposed backing between them.  
Do not use labels that have wrinkles  
or bubbles, or are damaged.  
Use Labels that lie flat.  
Do not print partial sheets of labels.  
Use only full sheets of labels.  
Transparencies  
Use only transparencies that are  
approved for use in laser printers.  
Do not use transparent print media  
not approved for laser printers.  
Place transparencies on a flat  
surface after removing them from  
the product.  
Letterhead or preprinted forms  
Heavy paper  
Use only letterhead or forms  
approved for use in laser printers.  
Do not use raised or metallic  
letterhead.  
Use only heavy paper that is  
approved for use in laser printers  
and meets the weight specifications  
for this product.  
Do not use paper that is heavier  
than the recommended media  
specification for this product unless  
it is HP paper that has been  
approved for use in this product.  
Glossy or coated paper  
Use only glossy or coated paper  
that is approved for use in laser  
printers.  
Do not use glossy or coated paper  
designed for use in inkjet products.  
100 Chapter 7 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
 
Load paper and print media  
You can load different media in the trays and then request media by type or size by using the control  
panel.  
Load Tray 1  
CAUTION: To avoid jams, never add or remove paper from Tray 1 during printing.  
1. Open Tray 1.  
2. Set the side guides to the correct width, and pull out the tray extensions to support paper.  
3. Load paper in the tray with the side to be printed on face down and the top of the paper or non-  
postage end facing the back of the printer.  
NOTE: For Letter Rotated and A4 Rotated sizes, place the side to be printed on face down, with  
the bottom of the page facing into the printer.  
4. Make sure the stack fits under the tabs on the guides and does not exceed the load-level indicators.  
5. Adjust the side guides so that they lightly touch the paper stack but do not bend it.  
ENWW  
Load paper and print media 101  
     
Print envelopes  
If your software does not automatically format an envelope, specify Landscape for page orientation in  
your software program or printer driver. Use the following guidelines to set margins for return and  
destination addresses on Commercial #10 or DL envelopes:  
Address type  
Left margin  
Top margin  
Return  
15 mm (0.6 in)  
102 mm (4 in)  
15 mm (0.6 in)  
51 mm (2 in)  
Destination  
For envelopes of other sizes, adjust the margin settings accordingly.  
Load trays 2, 3, 4, or 5  
Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 each hold up to 500 sheets of standard paper or a 54 mm (2.13-inch) stack of labels  
or other thick paper.  
Load standard-sized media into trays 2, 3, 4, or 5  
The product automatically detects the following standard sizes of media in these 500-sheet trays: Letter,  
Letter rotated, Legal, Executive, 11x17, A3, A4, A4 rotated, A5, B4 (JIS), and B5 (JIS).  
CAUTION: Do not print envelopes or unsupported sizes of paper from the 500-trays. Print on these  
types of paper only from Tray 1.  
1. Slide the tray from the product.  
NOTE: Do not open the input tray while it is in use. Doing so can cause jams in the product.  
102 Chapter 7 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
         
2. Adjust the paper width guide by squeezing the adjustment latch and sliding the guide to the size  
of the paper being used.  
3. Adjust the paper length guide by squeezing the adjustment latch and sliding the guide to the size  
of the paper being used.  
ENWW  
Load paper and print media 103  
4. Load paper into the tray face up. Check the paper to verify the guides lightly touch the stack, but  
do not bend it.  
NOTE: To prevent jams, do not overfill the input tray. Be sure the top of the stack is below the  
tray full indicator.  
NOTE: For best performance, fill the tray completely without splitting the ream of paper. Splitting  
the ream can cause a multifeed problem. The capacity of the paper tray can vary. For example, if  
you are using 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper, the tray holds a full ream of 500 sheets. If the media is heavier,  
the tray will not hold a full ream. Do not overfill the tray.  
NOTE: If the tray is not adjusted correctly, an error message might appear or the media might  
jam.  
5. Slide the tray into the product. The control panel shows the tray’s paper type and size. If the  
configuration is not correct, touch Modify on the control panel and select the correct configuration.  
If the configuration is correct, touch OK.  
Load undetectable standard-sized media into Tray 2, 3, 4, and 5  
The following undetectable standard-sized media is supported in the 500-sheet trays:  
Executive (JIS) (8.5 x 13)  
12 x 18 (Trays 3, 4, or 5 only)  
B4 (ISO)  
RA3 (Trays 3, 4, or 5 only)  
104 Chapter 7 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
   
SRA3 (Trays 3, 4, or 5 only)  
B5 (ISO)  
CAUTION: Do not print envelopes or unsupported sizes of paper from the 500-sheet trays. Print on  
these types of paper only from Tray 1. Do not overfill the input tray or open it while it is in use. Doing so  
can cause paper jams.  
Load custom-size media into tray 2, 3, 4, or 5  
To use custom media, change the size setting on the control panel to Custom and set the unit of  
measure, X dimension, and Y dimension. See Configure a tray to match print job settings  
on page 111 for more information.  
1. Slide open the tray from the product.  
2. Load the print media as described in steps 2 through 4 of the “Load detectable (standard-size)  
media into Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5” section. Then proceed to step 3 in this procedure.  
3. Slide the tray into the product. The control panel shows the tray type and size configuration. To  
specify specific custom dimensions, or if the type is not correct, touch Modify when the control  
panel prompts to change the size or type.  
X
Y
4. Select Custom, and then select the Unit of measure, X dimension and Y dimension for the custom  
paper size.  
5. Select the paper type and then touch Save.  
6. If the configuration is correct, touch Save.  
ENWW  
Load paper and print media 105  
   
Load large size paper into Tray 3, 4, or 5  
Use the following instructions if you are loading 11x17, RA3, SRA3, or 12 x 18-sized paper into Tray 3,  
4, or 5.  
1. Slide open Tray 3, 4, or 5.  
2. Adjust the paper width guide by squeezing the adjustment latch and sliding the guide to the size  
of the paper being used.  
3. Load the paper into the tray.  
4. Move the paper stop lever to the correct position for the paper being used.  
For SRA3-sized paper, rotate the lever all the way to the left.  
For A3- or 11x17-sized paper, rotate the lever down into the center position.  
For RA3- or 12x18-sized paper, rotate the lever all the way to the right.  
5. Slide the tray into the product. The control panel shows the tray’s media type and size. If the  
configuration is not correct, touch Modify and configure the tray to the correct type and size. If the  
configuration is correct, touch OK.  
Load letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper  
To correctly print or copy on letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper, you need to make sure you  
load the paper correctly into the tray. You might also need to adjust the Image Rotation setting on the  
product control panel. The Image Rotation setting is used to adjust for languages that read from left to  
right (the default) or from right to left.  
106 Chapter 7 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
     
Change the Image Rotation setting  
1. At the control panel home screen, scroll down and touch Administration.  
2. Scroll down and touch Device Behavior.  
3. Scroll down and touch Tray Behavior.  
4. Scroll down and touch Image Rotation.  
5. Touch the correct Image Rotation option. The default setting is Left to right.  
6. Touch OK.  
Choose the correct orientation for loading letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper  
The tables below should be used as a guide for loading letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper.  
The first table shows the tray-loading orientation when Image Rotation is set to Left to right, which  
indicates that the language reads left to right. The second table shows the tray-loading orientation when  
Image Rotation is set to Right to left, which indicates that the language reads right to left. The tables  
also contain the following information:  
The paper type: letterhead, pre-printed or pre-punched.  
The paper tray: Tray 1 or Trays 2 through 5.  
Image orientation: Portrait (1) or Landscape (2).  
1
2
One-sided or two-sided (duplex) printing.  
Stapling: The optional stapler/stacker or booklet maker output accessory must be attached in order  
to staple print or copy jobs. The staple location can be one left, one angled staple located in upper  
left corner; or two left, two staples located on left long edge. For more information about stapling,  
The arrow in the paper graphic indicates the direction the paper will feed into the printer. The paper  
graphic indicates the direction the paper should be placed in the paper tray. The default is to load  
the paper so that the long edge feeds first. This results in the most efficient printing and copying.  
ENWW  
Load paper and print media 107  
   
Table 7-6 Load letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper — Image Rotation = Left to right  
Paper type and  
tray  
Image orientation Duplex mode  
Staple location  
options  
How to load for  
long-edge feed  
How to load for  
short-edge feed  
Letterhead or Pre- Portrait  
printed – Tray 1  
1- sided  
2-sided  
1-sided  
2-sided  
1-sided  
2-sided  
1-sided  
2-sided  
One left, two left  
One left, two left  
One left, two left  
One left, two left  
One left, two left  
One left, two left  
One left, two left  
One left, two left  
Letterhead or Pre- Portrait  
printed – Tray 1  
HP Laserjet  
Letterhead or Pre- Landscape  
printed – Tray 1  
Letterhead or Pre- Landscape  
printed – Tray 1  
HP Laserjet  
Letterhead or Pre- Portrait  
printed – Trays 2-5  
HP Laserjet  
Letterhead or Pre- Portrait  
printed – Trays 2-5  
Letterhead or Pre- Landscape  
printed – Trays 2-5  
HP Laserjet  
Letterhead or Pre- Landscape  
printed – Trays 2-5  
108 Chapter 7 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
Table 7-6 Load letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper — Image Rotation = Left to right (continued)  
Paper type and  
tray  
Image orientation Duplex mode  
Staple location  
options  
How to load for  
long-edge feed  
How to load for  
short-edge feed  
Pre-punched –  
Tray 1  
Portrait  
1-sided or 2-sided One left, two left  
1-sided or 2-sided One left, two left  
1-sided or 2-sided One left, two left  
1-sided or 2-sided One left, two left  
Pre-punched –  
Tray 1  
Landscape  
Pre-punched –  
Trays 2-5  
Portrait  
Pre-punched –  
Trays 2-5  
Landscape  
Table 7-7 Load letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper — Image Rotation = Right to left  
Paper type and  
tray  
Image orientation Duplex mode  
Staple location  
options  
How to load for  
long-edge feed  
How to load for  
short-edge feed  
Letterhead or Pre- Portrait  
printed – Tray 1  
1-sided  
2-sided  
2-sided  
One right, two right  
One right, two right  
One right, two right  
Letterhead or Pre- Landscape  
printed – Tray 1  
t e j r e s a H P L  
Letterhead or Pre- Portrait  
printed – Trays 2-5  
ENWW  
Load paper and print media 109  
Table 7-7 Load letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-punched paper — Image Rotation = Right to left (continued)  
Paper type and  
tray  
Image orientation Duplex mode  
Staple location  
options  
How to load for  
long-edge feed  
How to load for  
short-edge feed  
Letterhead or Pre- Landscape  
printed – Trays 2-5  
1-sided  
One right, two right  
t e j r e s a H P L  
Pre-punched –  
Tray 1  
Portrait  
1-sided or 2-sided One right, two right  
1-sided or 2-sided One right, two right  
1-sided or 2-sided One right, two right  
1-sided or 2-sided One right, two right  
Pre-punched –  
Tray 1  
Landscape  
Pre-punched –  
Trays 2-5  
Portrait  
Pre-punched –  
Trays 2-5  
Landscape  
110 Chapter 7 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
Configure trays  
The product automatically prompts you to configure a tray for type and size in the following situations:  
When you load paper into the tray  
When you specify a particular tray or media type for a print job through the printer driver or a  
software program and the tray is not configured to match the print-job’s settings  
The following message appears on the control panel:Tray <x> [type] [size] To change size or type,  
touch “Modify”. To accept, touch “OK”.  
NOTE: The prompt does not appear if you are printing from Tray 1 and Tray 1 is configured for Any  
Custom and Any Type.  
NOTE: If you have used other HP LaserJet product models, you might be accustomed to configuring  
Tray 1 to First mode or Cassette mode. On the HP Color LaserJet CM6049f, setting Tray 1 size to Any  
Custom is equivalent to First mode. Setting size for Tray 1 to a setting other than Any Custom is  
equivalent to Cassette mode.  
Configure a tray when loading paper  
1. Load paper in the tray. Close the tray if you are using Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5.  
2. The tray configuration message appears.  
3. Touch OK to accept the detected size and type, or touch Modify to choose a different paper size  
or type.  
4. Select the correct size and type and then touch OK.  
NOTE: The product automatically detects most paper sizes in Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5.  
Configure a tray to match print job settings  
1. In the software program, specify the source tray, the paper size, and the paper type.  
2. Send the job to the product.  
If the tray needs to be configured, the Load Tray x <Type> <Size> message appears.  
3. Load the tray with the specified type and size of paper, and then close the tray.  
To specify a custom size, Modify.  
4. When the Tray <x> Size=<Size> message appears, touch OK to confirm the size.  
5. When the Tray<x> Type=<Type> message appears, touch OK to confirm the type and continue  
with the job.  
Automatic media type sensing (auto sense mode)  
The automatic media type sensor functions only when that tray is configured to Any Type or Plain type.  
Configuring a tray to any other type, such as Bond or Glossy, deactivates the media sensor in that tray.  
ENWW  
Configure trays 111  
         
The HP Color LaserJet CM6049f MFP can automatically classify many paper types into one of the  
following categories:  
Plain  
Transparency  
Glossy  
Extra-heavy glossy  
Glossy film  
Heavy  
For more control, a specific type must be selected in the job or configured in a tray.  
Auto sense settings  
Full sensing (default for Tray 1)  
The product recognizes light, plain, heavy, glossy, and tough paper and overhead transparencies.  
Each time the product begins a print job, it stops the first page to sense the type.  
This is the slowest mode.  
Expanded sensing (default for Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5)  
Each time the product begins a print job, it stops the first page to sense the type.  
The product assumes that the second and all subsequent pages are of the same media type as  
the first page.  
This is the second-fastest mode, and is useful for using stacks of the same media type.  
Transparency only  
The product does not stop any pages for sensing but distinguishes between transparencies  
(Transparency mode) and paper (Normal mode).  
This is the fastest mode and is useful for high-volume printing in Normal mode.  
For more information about setting these options, see Print Quality menu on page 48  
Select the paper by source, type, or size  
In the Microsoft Windows operating system, three settings affect how the printer driver tries to pull media  
when you send a print job. Source, Type, and Size settings appear in the Page Setup, Print, or Print  
Properties dialog boxes in most software programs. Unless you change these settings, the product  
automatically selects a tray using the default settings.  
Source  
To print by Source select a specific tray for the product to pull from. If you select a tray that is configured  
for a type or size that does not match your print job, the product prompts you to load the tray with the  
type or size of print media for your print job before printing it. When you load the tray, the product begins  
printing.  
112 Chapter 7 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
       
Type and Size  
Printing by Type or Size means that you want the product to pull from the tray that is loaded with the  
correct type and size of media. Selecting media by type rather than source is similar to locking out trays  
and helps protect special media from accidental use. For example, if a tray is configured for letterhead  
and you select plain paper, the product will not pull the letterhead from that tray. Instead, it will pull from  
a tray that has plain paper loaded and is configured for plain paper on the product control panel. Selecting  
media by Type and Size results in significantly better print quality for heavy paper, glossy paper, and  
transparencies. Using the wrong setting might result in unsatisfactory print quality. Always print by Type  
for special print media, such as labels or transparencies. Print by Size for envelopes, if possible.  
To print by Type or Size, select the Type or Size from the Page Setup dialog box, the Print dialog  
box, or the Print Properties dialog box, depending on the software program.  
If you often print on a certain type or size of media, configure a tray for that type or size. Then,  
when you select that type or size as you print a job, the product automatically pulls media from the  
tray that is configured for that type or size.  
ENWW  
Configure trays 113  
 
Choose an output location  
Standard output bins  
The product has an ADF output bin and the standard output bin for printed pages.  
2
1
1
2
Standard output bin  
ADF output bin (for copy originals)  
When you scan or copy documents by using the ADF, the originals are automatically delivered to the  
ADF output bin. Copies made from the scanner glass are delivered to the standard output bin or the  
output bin(s) on the stapler/stacker or the 3-bin mailbox.  
When you send print jobs to the product from a computer, the output is to the standard output bin or the  
output bin(s) on the stapler/stacker or the 3-bin mailbox.  
Optional output accessories  
An optional 3 bin stapler/stacker or booklet-maker finisher accessory can be installed with the product.  
When an accessory is installed, an output accessory bridge is also added on top of the product in order  
to route the print jobs to the accessory output bins.  
3-bin stapler/stacker features  
Table 7-8 3-bin stapler/stacker features  
Job offset  
Each copy of a job is shifted to one side in the output bin in order to keep each copy separate  
from the others. (Supported paper sizes: A3, A4, A4 rotated, A5, B4, B5, Ledger, Legal, Letter,  
Letter rotated, Statement.)  
114 Chapter 7 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
           
Table 7-8 3-bin stapler/stacker features (continued)  
Three operation modes  
Mailbox Mode assigns each bin to a user or group of users. Stacker Mode uses all three output  
bins for all print jobs — when one bin is full, jobs are routed to the next bin. Function Separator  
Mode sends copies to bin 1, faxes to bin 2, and print jobs to bin 3.  
Stapler  
Built-in stapler staples jobs up to 50 sheets in size or 30 stapled jobs. Pages can be stapled  
in one position at the front, in one position at the back, or at two positions at the side or top.  
Large-capacity output bins  
The stacker has three bins: a 100-sheet bin, a 500-sheet bin, and a 1000-sheet bin.  
Booklet maker finisher features  
Table 7-9 Booklet-maker finisher features  
Booklet-making  
Folding  
The booklet-making feature staples and folds print jobs of 2 to 15 pages into a booklet.  
Single-sheet print jobs can be automatically folded in the center.  
Job offset  
Each copy of a job is shifted to one side in the output bin in order to keep each copy separate  
from the others. (Supported paper sizes: A3, A4, A4 rotated, A5, B4, B5, Ledger, Legal, Letter,  
Letter rotated, Statement.)  
Two operation modes  
Stapler  
Mailbox Mode assigns each bin to a user or group of users, and Stacker Mode uses both  
output bins for all print jobs — when the top bin is full, jobs are routed to the next bin.  
Built-in stapler staples jobs up to 50 sheets in size or 30 stapled jobs. Pages can be stapled  
in one position at the front, in one position at the back, or at two positions at the side or top.  
Large-capacity output bins  
The stacker has three bins: two 1000-sheet bins and one bin that can hold up to 25 saddle-  
stitched booklets.  
Accessory walkaround  
Figure 7-1 3-bin stapler/stacker accessory  
4
5
2
3
1
1
2
3
4
5
Output bins  
Front door  
Stapler unit  
Top cover  
Connection cable  
ENWW  
Choose an output location 115  
     
Figure 7-2 Booklet-maker finisher accessory  
6
7
5
3
4
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Booklet bin guide  
Booklet output bin  
Stacking output bins  
Front door  
Stapler units  
Top cover  
Connection cable  
Use the booklet-making feature  
You can create booklets from the print driver or by copying an original document.  
Before creating a booklet, set the booklet bin guide for the size of paper being used:  
Closed: 11x17, Legal, A3, or B4  
Open: Letter Rotated, A4 Rotated  
116 Chapter 7 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
     
Create a booklet from the print driver  
1. On the File menu of your software program, click Print.  
2. Select HP Color LaserJet CM6049f MFP.  
3. Click Properties, and then click Booklet Printing.  
4. Set the Paper source, Paper sizes, Paper type, Orientation, Booklet Layout, Print document  
on, andStaple settings, and then click OK.  
5. Click OK to print.  
Create a booklet from a copy  
Documents can be copied from the automatic document feeder (ADF) or by placing the document on  
the scanner glass.  
1. From the control panel, touch Copy.  
2. Scroll to and touch Booklet Format.  
3. Touch Booklet on.  
4. For Original Sides touch 1-sided or 2-sided.  
5. Touch OK and then touch Start.  
ENWW  
Choose an output location 117  
   
Configure the accessory operation mode  
Select the operating mode at the control panel  
You can set the operating mode for the stapler/stacker or the booklet maker at the product control panel.  
1. At the control panel, touch Administration, and then touch Device behavior.  
2. Touch MBM-3 bin stapler or Multifunction finisher.  
3. Touch Operation mode, and then select the operation mode that you want to use.  
When Mailbox Mode is used, each bin is assigned to a user or group of users. Every time a  
user sends a print job, the job is routed to the assigned bin.  
When Stacker Mode is used and the optional 3-bin stapler/stacker is installed, the three bins  
act as a single bigger bin. When one bin gets full, jobs are automatically routed to the next  
bin. When Stacker Mode is used and the booklet maker finisher is installed, the two upper  
bins act as a single bin, and the third bin is reserved for booklets.  
When Function Separator (3-bin stapler/stacker only) mode is used, each bin is assigned to  
a specific kind of job. Usually this designation is bin 1 for copies, bin 2 for fax, and bin 3 for  
printing. These values can be modified in the Default Job Options menus for copy, fax, and  
print.  
NOTE: Use the product embedded Web server to assign output bins to users or groups of users.  
For more information see Embedded Web server on page 178.  
Select the operating mode in the printer driver  
1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Printers (for Windows 2000) or Printers  
and Faxes (for Windows XP).  
From your Vista computer click Start, click Control Panel, and then in the category for Hardware  
and Sound click Printer.  
2. Right-click the HP product icon, and then click Properties or Printing Preferences.  
3. Click the Device Settings tab.  
4. Perform one of the following actions:  
For automatic configuration: under Installable Options, click Update Now in the Automatic  
Configuration list.  
-or-  
For manual configuration: under Installable Options, select the appropriate operation mode in the  
Accessory Output Bin list.  
5. Click Apply to save the settings.  
Select the operating mode in the printer driver (Mac OS X)  
1. In the Apple menu, click System Preferences.  
2. In the System Preferences box, click Print and Fax.  
3. Click Set Up Printers. A Printer List displays.  
118 Chapter 7 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
       
4. Select the HP product, and then click Show Info on the Printers menu.  
5. Select the Installable Options panel.  
6. In the Accessory Output Bins list, select correct accessory.  
7. In the Mailbox Mode list, select the appropriate operational mode, and then click Apply  
Changes.  
ENWW  
Choose an output location 119  
120 Chapter 7 Paper and print media  
ENWW  
Economy settings  
Sleep and wake  
Set the sleep delay  
Use the sleep-delay feature to select the time interval the product remains inactive before entering sleep  
mode. The default is one hour.  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Touch Time/Scheduling.  
3. Touch Sleep Delay.  
4. Touch the sleep-delay setting that you want and then touch Save.  
Set the wake time  
Use the wake time feature to wake the product at a set time each day.  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Touch Time/Scheduling.  
3. Touch Wake Time.  
4. Touch the day of the week for the wake time.  
5. Touch Custom.  
6. Touch Save.  
7. Touch the appropriate options to set the correct hour, minute, and AM/PM setting.  
8. If you want to wake the product at the same time each day, on the Apply to all days screen, touch  
Yes. If you want to set the time for individual days, touch No, and repeat the procedure for each  
day.  
Set the sleep time  
Use the sleep time feature to program the product to enter sleep mode at a set time each day.  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Touch Time/Scheduling.  
3. Touch Sleep Time.  
4. Touch the day of the week for the sleep time setting.  
5. Touch Custom.  
6. Touch Save.  
122 Chapter 8 Use product features  
ENWW  
       
7. Touch the appropriate options to set the correct hour, minute, and AM/PM setting.  
8. If you want the product to enter sleep mode at the same time each day, on the Apply to all  
days screen, touch Yes. If you want to set the time for individual days, touch No, and repeat the  
procedure for each day.  
Set economy modes from the EWS  
1. From a Web browser, open the EWS. See Embedded Web server on page 178.  
2. Click Settings and then Wake Time.  
3. Set the wake time for each day of the week.  
4. Set the sleep delay for the product.  
5. Click Apply.  
ENWW  
Economy settings 123  
 
Use the stapler  
The automatic stapler is only available with the optional HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker (CC517A) or HP  
booklet Maker/Finisher Accessory (CC516A).  
Print jobs can be stapled with a diagonal staple in either top corner, with two horizontal staples at the  
top of the page, or with two vertical staples at either side of the page.  
Paper weight can range from 60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 148 lbs.). Heavier paper might have a stapling  
limit of fewer than 50 sheets.  
The optional stapler/stacker can staple jobs of up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper. It can stack  
up to 1,000 sheets of paper, or 30 stapled jobs, whichever is less.  
The optional booklet maker can also staple jobs of up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper. It can  
staple and fold up to 15 pages into a booklet. It can stack up to 1,000 sheets of paper, (or 30 stapled  
jobs) or up to 25 saddle-stitched booklets.  
If the job consists of only one sheet, or if it consists of more than 50 sheets, the product delivers  
the job to the bin, but does not staple the job.  
The stapler supports paper only. Do not try to staple other types of print media, such as envelopes,  
transparencies, or labels.  
NOTE: For information on loading letterhead, pre-printed, and pre-punched paper, see Load  
When you want the product to staple or fold a document, select the correct option in the software. You  
can usually select the stapler in your program or printer driver, although some options might be available  
only in the printer driver. Where and how you make selections depends on your program or printer driver.  
If you cannot select the stapler or booklet maker finisher in the program or printer driver, select it at the  
product control panel.  
The stapler accepts print jobs if it is out of staples, but it does not staple the pages. The product can be  
configured to stop printing if the staple cartridge is empty.  
Supported paper sizes for stapling  
In order to staple a print job, you must be a supported paper size and orientation.  
Corner, angled staples are supported with the following paper sizes: A4, A4 Rotated, Letter, Letter  
Rotated, Legal, A3, 11 x 17, and B4 (JIS).  
Two staples at the top or side of the print job are supported with the following paper sizes: A4, Letter,  
A3, 11 x 17, and B4 (JIS).  
Saddle-stitch stapling with the booklet maker can be carried out with these sizes: A4 Rotated, Letter  
Rotated, Legal, A3, 11 x 17, and B4 (JIS).  
As shown in the graphic below, the paper must also be loaded into the paper trays with the correct  
orientation.  
124 Chapter 8 Use product features  
ENWW  
   
A4  
LTR  
A4  
LTR  
A4  
LTR  
If the correct paper size or orientation is not used, the print job will print, but it will not be stapled.  
NOTE: For information about loading and stapling print or copy jobs on letterhead, pre-printed, or pre-  
ENWW  
Use the stapler 125  
Staple print jobs  
NOTE: For staple job capacity see 3-bin stapler/stacker features on page 114  
Select the stapler at the control panel for printed jobs  
1. Touch Administration and then touch Device Behavior.  
2. Touch MBM-3 Bin Stapler or Multifunc Finisher.  
3. Touch Staples.  
4. Touch the option that you want to use: One Left Angled, One Right Angled, Two Left, Two Right,  
and Two Top.  
NOTE: Selecting the stapler at the printer control panel changes the default setting. It is possible that  
all print jobs will be stapled. However, settings that are changed in the printer driver override settings  
that are changed at the control panel.  
Select the stapler in the printer driver for printed jobs (Windows)  
NOTE: The following procedure changes the default setting to staple all print jobs.  
1. Open the printer driver. See Change printer-driver settings for Windows on page 67.  
2. On the Output tab, click the drop-down list under Staple, and select a staple option.  
Select the stapler in the printer driver for printed jobs (Mac)  
Select the stapler by creating a new preset in the printer driver.  
2. Create the new preset.  
Configure the device to stop or continue when the staple cartridge is empty  
You can specify whether the product stops printing when the staple cartridge is empty or if it continues  
printing but does not staple the jobs.  
1. Touch Administration and then touch Device Behavior.  
2. Touch MBM-3 Bin Stapler or Multifunc Finisher.  
3. Touch Staples Out.  
4. Touch the option that you want to use:  
Select Stop to stop all printing until the staple cartridge is replaced.  
Select Continue to continue printing jobs without stapling them.  
126 Chapter 8 Use product features  
ENWW  
   
Job storage features for print jobs  
You can save a print job to the product hard disk without printing it. You can then print the job at any  
time at the control panel. The following job-storage features are available for print jobs:  
Proof and hold jobs: This feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof one copy of  
a job and then print the additional copies.  
Personal jobs: When you send a private job to the device, the job does not print until you provide  
the required personal identification number (PIN) at the control panel.  
QuickCopy jobs: You can print the requested number of copies of a job and then store a copy of  
the job on the device hard disk. Storing the job allows you to print additional copies of the job later.  
Stored jobs: You can store a job such as a personnel form, time sheet, or calendar on the device  
and allow other users to print the job at any time. Stored jobs also can be protected by a PIN.  
Follow the instructions in this section to gain access to the job storage features at the computer. See  
the specific section for the type of job that you want to create.  
CAUTION: If you turn off the device, all QuickCopy, proof and hold, and personal jobs are deleted.  
Gain access to the job storage features  
For Windows  
1. On the File menu, click Print.  
2. Click Properties, and then click the Job Storage tab.  
3. Select the job storage mode that you want.  
For Macintosh  
In newer drivers: Select Job Storage in the pull-down menu in the Print dialog box. In older drivers,  
select Printer Specific Options.  
Use the proof and hold feature  
The proof and hold feature provides a quick and easy way to print and proof one copy of a job and then  
to print the additional copies.  
To permanently store the job and prevent the device from deleting it when space is needed for something  
else, select the Stored Job option in the driver.  
Create a proof and hold job  
CAUTION: If the device needs additional space to store newer proof and hold jobs, the device deletes  
other stored proof and hold jobs, starting with the oldest job. To permanently store a job and prevent  
the device from deleting it when space is needed, select the Stored Job option in the driver instead of  
the Proof and Hold option.  
In the driver, select the Proof and Hold option and type a user name and job name.  
The device prints one copy of the job for you to proof.  
ENWW  
Job storage features for print jobs 127  
             
Print the remaining copies of a proof and hold job  
At the device control panel, use the following procedure to print the remaining copies of a job held on  
the hard disk.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.  
2. Touch the Retrieve tab.  
3. Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the job.  
4. Scroll to and touch the job that you want to print.  
5. Select the number of copies on the numeric keypad.  
6. Touch Retrieve Stored Job  
to print the document.  
Delete a proof and hold job  
When you send a proof and hold job, the device automatically deletes your previous proof and hold job.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.  
2. Touch the Retrieve tab.  
3. Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the job.  
4. Scroll to and touch the job that you want to delete.  
5. Touch Delete.  
6. Touch Yes.  
128 Chapter 8 Use product features  
ENWW  
   
Use the personal job feature  
Use the personal job feature to specify that a job is not printed until you release it. Your job will be stored  
on the product and nothing will be printed until you request the job from the product's control panel.  
Once the job is printed, it will be automatically removed from the product's job storage. Personal jobs  
can be stored with or without a 4-digit personal identification number (PIN). To make the job private, a  
PIN must be used.  
Print a personal job  
You can print a personal job at the control panel after the job has been sent to the product.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.  
2. Touch the Retrieve tab.  
3. Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the personal job.  
4. Scroll to and touch the personal job that you want to print.  
5. If a PIN is required, touch the PIN field.  
6. Use the numeric keypad to type the PIN, and then touch OK.  
7. Select the number of copies on the numeric keypad to change the number of copies to print.  
8. Touch Retrieve Stored Job  
to print the document.  
Delete a personal job  
A personal job is automatically deleted from the device hard disk after you release it for printing. If you  
want to delete the job without printing it, use this procedure.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.  
2. Touch the Retrieve tab.  
3. Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the personal job.  
4. Scroll to and touch the personal job that you want to delete.  
NOTE: A personal job will have a lock symbol next to it.  
5. Touch the PIN field.  
6. Use the numeric keypad to type the PIN, and then touch OK.  
7. Touch Delete.  
8. Touch Yes.  
ENWW  
Job storage features for print jobs 129  
       
Use the QuickCopy feature  
The QuickCopy feature prints the requested number of copies of a job and stores a copy on the device  
hard disk. Additional copies of the job can be printed later. This feature can be turned off in the printer  
driver.  
The default number of different QuickCopy jobs that can be stored on the device is 32. At the control  
panel, you can set a different default number. See Navigate the Administration menu on page 15.  
Create a QuickCopy job  
CAUTION: If the device needs additional space to store newer QuickCopy jobs, the device deletes  
other stored QuickCopy jobs, starting with the oldest job. To permanently store a job and prevent the  
device from deleting it when space is needed, select the Job Storage option in the driver instead of the  
QuickCopy option.  
In the driver, select the QuickCopy option, and then type a user name and a job name.  
When you send the job to print, the device prints the number of copies that you set in the driver. To print  
more quick copies at the device control panel, see Print additional copies of a QuickCopy job  
Print additional copies of a QuickCopy job  
This procedure describes how to print additional copies of a job stored on the device hard disk at the  
control panel.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.  
2. Touch the Retrieve tab.  
3. Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the job.  
4. Scroll to and touch the job that you want to print.  
5. Select the number of copies on the numeric keypad to change the number of copies to print.  
6. Touch Retrieve Stored Job  
to print the document.  
Delete a QuickCopy job  
Delete a QuickCopy job at the device control panel when you no longer need it. If the device requires  
additional space to store new QuickCopy jobs, the device automatically deletes other stored QuickCopy  
jobs, starting with the oldest job.  
NOTE: Stored QuickCopy jobs can be deleted at the control panel or in HP Web Jetadmin.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.  
2. Touch the Retrieve tab.  
3. Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the job.  
4. Scroll to and touch the job that you want to delete.  
5. Touch Delete.  
6. Touch Yes.  
130 Chapter 8 Use product features  
ENWW  
         
Use the stored job feature for copy jobs  
You also can create a stored copy job at the control panel that can be printed at a later time.  
Create a stored copy job  
1. Place the original document face-down on the glass or face-up in the ADF.  
2. From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.  
3. Touch Create.  
4. To create a Job Name, touch the New Job button to open the keyboard.  
5. Type the name of the folder on the touch screen keyboard.  
6. Select Job Name from the drop-down menu.  
7. Type the job name on the touch screen keyboard.  
8. If it is a private job, select PIN to print. Enter the PIN in the popup box.  
9. Touch OK.  
10. After all the options are set, touch Start to scan the document and save the file.  
For information about printing the job, see Print a stored job on page 131  
Print a stored job  
At the control panel, you can print a job that is stored on the device hard disk.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.  
2. Touch the Retrieve tab.  
3. Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the stored job.  
4. Scroll to and touch the stored job that you want to print.  
5. Touch Retrieve Stored Job  
to print the document.  
6. Select the number of copies on the numeric keypad to change the number of copies to print.  
7. Touch Retrieve Stored Job to print the document.  
If the file has lock symbol next to it, the job is a private job and requires a PIN. See Use the personal  
Delete a stored job  
Jobs stored on the device hard disk can be deleted at the control panel.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Job Storage.  
2. Touch the Retrieve tab.  
3. Scroll to and touch the job storage folder that holds the stored job.  
4. Scroll to and touch the stored job that you want to delete.  
ENWW  
Job storage features for print jobs 131  
       
5. Touch Delete.  
6. Touch Yes.  
If the file has lock symbol next to it, the job requires a PIN to delete it. See Use the personal job feature  
132 Chapter 8 Use product features  
ENWW  
Print photos or marketing material  
You can use the HP Color LaserJet CM6049f to print high-quality color photos, marketing and sales  
material, or other color documents on glossy paper. To maximize the quality of this output you must do  
the following:  
Choose the appropriate paper  
Configure the paper tray correctly  
Choose the correct settings in the print driver  
Supported glossy paper  
HP glossy paper product  
Product code  
Product size  
Control panel and print  
driver settings  
HP Color Laser Presentation Q6541A  
Paper, Soft Gloss  
Letter  
HP soft gloss 120 g  
HP soft gloss 120 g  
HP glossy 160 g  
HP glossy 160 g  
HP glossy 220 g  
HP glossy 220 g  
HP glossy 220 g  
HP glossy 220 g  
HP Color Laser Professional Q6542A  
Paper, Soft Gloss  
A4  
HP Color Laser Brochure  
Paper, Glossy  
Q6611A, Q6610A  
Letter  
HP Color Laser Superior  
Paper, Glossy  
Q6616A  
A4  
HP Color Laser Photo Paper, Q6607A, Q6608A  
Glossy  
Letter  
HP Color Laser Photo Paper, Q6614A  
Glossy  
A4  
HP Color Laser Photo Paper, Q8842A  
Glossy 4x6  
101.6 x 152.4 mm (4 x 6 in)  
101.6 x 152.4 mm (4 x 6 in)  
HP Color Laser Photo Paper, Q8843A  
Glossy 10 cm x 15 cm  
CAUTION: HP Color Laser Presentation Paper, Glossy (Q2546A) is not supported with this product.  
Using this type of paper can cause a fuser jam that might require the replacement of the fuser. Two  
recommended alternatives are HP Color LaserJet Presentation Paper, Soft Gloss (Q6541A) and  
HP Color LaserJet Brochure Paper, Glossy (Q6611A, Q6610A).  
Configure the paper tray  
Configure the paper tray for the correct paper type.  
1. Load the paper into Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5.  
2. After you close the tray, the control panel prompts you to configure the paper size and type.  
3. If the correct size and type is displayed, touch OK to accept the detected size and type, or  
Modify to choose a different paper size and type.  
ENWW  
Print photos or marketing material 133  
     
4. When the paper size prompt appears, touch the correct size, and then touch Save.  
5. When the paper type prompt appears, touch the correct type. See the table above to determine  
the correct paper type.  
Configure the driver settings  
Carry out the following steps to print to glossy paper from your graphics software program.  
1. Select Print from the File menu of your software program.  
2. Select the HP Color LaserJet CM6049f, and then click Properties or Printing Preferences.  
3. From the Paper type drop-down list, select the same paper type that you configured on the product  
control panel.  
4. Click OK to save the settings and OK to print. The print job will automatically be printed from the  
tray that has been configured for glossy paper, optimizing print quality for that type.  
134 Chapter 8 Use product features  
ENWW  
 
Print weatherproof maps and outdoor signs  
You can use the HP Color LaserJet CM6049f to print durable, waterproof maps, signs, or menus by  
using HP Tough Paper. HP Tough Paper is a waterproof, tear-proof, satin finish paper that retains rich,  
vibrant print color and clarity even when exposed to heavy usage or weather. This avoids the expensive  
and time-consuming laminating that is required with plain papers. To maximize the quality of this output  
you must do the following:  
Choose the appropriate paper  
Configure the paper tray correctly  
Choose the correct settings in the print driver  
Supported tough paper  
HP paper name  
Product code  
Product size  
Control panel and print  
driver settings  
HP LaserJet Tough Paper  
HP LaserJet Tough Paper  
Q1298A  
Q1298B  
Letter  
A4  
HP Tough Paper  
HP Tough Paper  
Configure the paper tray  
Configure the paper tray for the correct paper type.  
1. Load the paper into Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5.  
2. After you close the tray, the control panel prompts you to configure the paper size and type.  
3. If the correct size is displayed, touch OK to accept the detected size, or Modify to choose a different  
paper size and type.  
4. When the paper size prompt appears, touch the correct size, and then touch Save. When the paper  
type prompt appears, touch the correct type. See the table above to determine the correct paper  
type.  
Configure the driver settings  
Carry out the following steps to print to tough paper from your graphics software program.  
1. Select Print from the File menu of your software program.  
2. Select the HP Color LaserJet CM6049f MFP, and then click Properties or Printing  
Preferences.  
3. From the Paper type drop-down list, select the same paper type that you configured on the product  
control panel.  
4. Click OK to save the settings and OK to print. The print job will automatically be printed from the  
tray that has been configured for tough paper.  
ENWW  
Print weatherproof maps and outdoor signs 135  
       
Set the duplex alignment  
For duplexed documents such as brochures, set the registration for the tray before printing to ensure  
the pages align.  
1. From the control panel, touch Administration and then touch Print Quality.  
2. Touch Set Registration, and then touch the tray you are adjusting.  
3. Touch Test Page and then touch Print.  
4. Follow the steps on the page that prints.  
136 Chapter 8 Use product features  
ENWW  
 
Cancel a print job  
You can stop a print request by using the control panel or by using the software program. For instructions  
about how to stop a print request from a computer on a network, see the online Help for the specific  
network software.  
NOTE: It can take some time for all printing to clear after you have canceled a print job.  
Stop the current print job from the control panel  
Press Stop on the control panel.  
Stop the current print job from the software program  
A dialog box will appear briefly on the screen, giving you the option to cancel the print job.  
If several requests have been sent to the device through your software, they might be waiting in a print  
queue (for example, in Windows Print Manager). See the software documentation for specific  
instructions about canceling a print request from the computer.  
If a print job is waiting in a print queue (computer memory) or print spooler (Windows), delete the print  
job there.  
Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes . Double-click the device  
icon to open the print spooler. Select the print job that you want to cancel, and then press Delete. If the  
print job is not cancelled, you might need to shut down and restart the computer. If the job is not in the  
print spooler, use the Job Status menu from control panel to cancel the job.  
138 Chapter 9 Print tasks  
ENWW  
       
Use features in the Windows printer driver  
Open the printer driver  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Open the printer driver  
On the File menu in the software program, click Print. Select  
the printer, and then click Properties or Preferences.  
Get help for any printing option  
Click the ? symbol in the upper-right corner of the printer driver,  
and then click any item in the printer driver. A pop-up message  
displays that provides information about the item. Or, click  
Help to open the online Help.  
Use printing shortcuts  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Printing Shortcuts tab.  
NOTE: In previous HP printer drivers, this feature was called Quick Sets.  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Use a printing shortcut  
Select one of the shortcuts, and then click OK to print the job  
with the predefined settings.  
Create a custom printing shortcut  
a) Select an existing shortcut as a base. b) Select the print  
options for the new shortcut. c) Click Save As, type a name for  
the shortcut, and click OK.  
Set paper and quality options  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Paper/Quality tab.  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Select a page size  
Select a size from the Paper size drop-down list.  
Select a custom page size  
a) Click Custom. The Custom Paper Size dialog box opens.  
b) Type a name for the custom size, specify the dimensions,  
and click OK.  
Select a paper source  
Select a tray from the Paper source drop-down list.  
Select a type from the Paper type drop-down list.  
Select a paper type  
Print covers on different paper  
Print the first or last page on different paper  
a) In the Special pages area, click Covers or Print pages on  
different paper, and then click Settings. b) Select an option  
to print a blank or preprinted front cover, back cover, or both.  
Or, select an option to print the first or last page on different  
paper. c) Select options from the Paper source and Paper  
type drop-down lists, and then click Add. d) Click OK.  
Adjust the resolution of printed images  
In the Print Quality area, select an option from the first drop-  
down list. See the printer-driver online Help for information  
about each of the available options.  
ENWW  
Use features in the Windows printer driver 139  
           
Set document effects  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Effects tab.  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Scale a page to fit on a selected paper size  
Click Print document on, and then select a size from the drop-  
down list.  
Scale a page to be a percent of the actual size  
Print a watermark  
Click % of actual size, and then type the percent or adjust the  
slider bar.  
a) Select a watermark from the Watermarks drop-down list.  
b) To print the watermark on the first page only, click First page  
only. Otherwise, the watermark is printed on each page.  
Add or edit watermarks  
a) In the Watermarks area, click Edit. The Watermark  
Details dialog box opens. b) Specify the settings for the  
watermark, and then click OK.  
NOTE: The printer driver must be stored on your computer  
for this to work.  
Set document finishing options  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Finishing tab.  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Print on both sides (Duplex)  
Click Print on both sides. If you will bind the document along  
the top edge, click Flip pages up.  
Print a booklet  
a) Click Print on both sides. b) In the Booklet layout drop-  
down list, click Left binding or Right binding. The Pages per  
sheet option automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet.  
Print multiple pages per sheet  
Select page orientation  
a) Select the number of pages per sheet from the Pages per  
sheet drop-down list. b) Select the correct options for Print  
page borders, Page order, and Orientation.  
a) In the Orientation area, click Portrait or Landscape. b) To  
print the page image upside down, click Rotate by 180  
degrees.  
Set product output options  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Output tab.  
NOTE: The options that are available on this tab depend on the finishing device that you are using.  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Select staple options  
Select an output bin  
Select a stapling option from the Staple drop-down list.  
Select an output bin from the Bin drop-down list.  
Set job storage options  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Job Storage tab.  
140 Chapter 9 Print tasks  
ENWW  
       
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Print one copy for proof before printing all the copies  
In the Job Storage Mode area, click Proof and Hold. The  
product prints the first copy only. A message appears on the  
product control panel that prompts you to print the rest of the  
copies.  
Temporarily store a private job on the product and print it later a) In the Job Storage Mode area, click Personal Job. b) In  
the Make Job Private area, enter a 4-digit personal  
identification number (PIN) (optional).  
Temporarily store a job on the product  
In the Job Storage Mode area, click Quick Copy. One copy  
of the job is printed immediately, but you can print more copies  
from the product control panel.  
NOTE: These jobs are deleted if the product is turned off.  
Permanently store a job on the product  
In the Job Storage Mode area, click Stored Job.  
Make a permanently stored job private so that anyone who  
tries to print it must provide a PIN  
a) In the Job Storage Mode area, click Stored Job. b) In the  
Make Job Private area, click PIN to print, and then enter a 4-  
digit personal identification number (PIN).  
Receive notification when someone prints a stored job  
Set the user name for a stored job  
In the Job Notification Options area, click Display Job ID  
when printing.  
In the User Name area, click User name to use the Windows  
default user name. To provide a different user name, click  
Custom and type the name.  
Specify a name for the stored job  
a) In the Job Name area, click Automatic to use the default  
job name. To specify a job name, click Custom and type the  
name. b) Select an option from the If job name exists drop-  
down list. Select Use Job Name + (1-99) to add a number to  
the end of the existing name, or select Replace Existing  
File to overwrite a job that already has that name.  
Set color options  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Color tab.  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Manually adjust color settings  
a) In the Color Options area, click Manual, and then click  
Settings. b) You can adjust the general settings for Edge  
Control, and settings for text, graphics, and photographs. See  
the online Help in the driver for information about each option.  
Turn off color printing and use only shades of gray.  
Change the way that colors are rendered  
In the Color Options area, click Grayscale.  
In the Color Themes area, select an option from the drop-  
down list. See the online Help in the driver for information about  
each option.  
Obtain support and product-status information  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Services tab.  
ENWW  
Use features in the Windows printer driver 141  
   
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Obtain support information for the product  
In the Internet Services drop-down list, select a support  
option, and click Go!  
Check the status of the product, including the level of supplies Click the Device and Supplies Status icon. The Device  
Status page of the HP embedded Web server opens.  
Set advanced printing options  
To perform the following tasks, open the printer driver and click the Advanced tab.  
How do I  
Steps to perform  
Select advanced printing options  
In any of the sections, click a current setting to activate a drop-  
down list so you can change the setting.  
Change the number of copies that are printed  
Open the Paper/Output section, and then enter the number of  
copies to print. If you select 2 or more copies, you can select  
the option to collate the pages.  
NOTE: If the software program that you are using does not  
provide a way to print a particular number of copies, you can  
change the number of copies in the driver.  
Changing this setting affects the number of copies for all print  
jobs. After your job has printed, restore this setting to the  
original value.  
Print colored text as black rather than as shades of gray  
a) Open the Document Options section, and then open the  
Printer Features section. b) In the Print All Text as Black  
drop-down list, select Enabled.  
Load letterhead or preprinted paper the same way for every  
job, whether printing on one or both sides of the page  
a) Open the Document Options section, and then open the  
Printer Features section. b) In the Alternative Letterhead  
Mode drop-down list, select On. c) At the product, load the  
paper the same way you would for printing on both sides.  
Change the order in which pages are printed  
a) Open the Document Options section, and then open the  
Layout Options section. b) In the Page Order drop-down list,  
select Front to Back to print the pages in the same order as  
they are in the document, or select Back to Front to print the  
pages in the reverse order.  
142 Chapter 9 Print tasks  
ENWW  
 
10 Use color  
ENWW  
143  
   
Manage color  
Setting color options to Automatic typically produces the best possible print quality for the most common  
printing requirements. However, for some documents, setting the color options manually can enhance  
the way the document appears. Examples of these documents include marketing brochures that contain  
many images or documents that are printed on a paper type that is not listed in the printer driver.  
Use the printer driver to adjust color settings. For more information, see Set color options  
on page 141 for Windows and Set the color options on page 78 for Macintosh.  
Automatic or manual color adjustment  
The Automatic color adjustment option optimizes the neutral gray color treatment, halftones, and edge  
enhancements that are used for each element in a document.  
NOTE: Automatic is the default setting and is recommended for printing most color documents.  
The Manual color adjustment option allows you to adjust the neutral gray color treatment, halftones,  
and edge enhancements for text, graphics, and photographs.  
Manual color options  
You can manually adjust color options for Edge Control, Halftones, and Neutral Grays.  
Edge Control  
The Edge Control setting determines how edges are rendered. Edge control has three components:  
adaptive halftoning, Resolution Enhancement technology (REt), and trapping. Adaptive halftoning  
increases the edge sharpness. Trapping reduces the effect of incorrect color alignment by slightly  
overlapping the edges of adjacent objects. The color REt option smoothes the edges.  
NOTE: If you notice white gaps between objects, or if you notice areas that have a slight shadow of  
cyan, magenta, or yellow at the edge, choose an edge-control setting that increases the trapping level.  
Four levels of edge control are available:  
Maximum is the most aggressive trapping setting. Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are  
on.  
Normal is the default trapping setting. Trapping is at a medium level. Adaptive halftoning and color  
REt settings are on.  
Light sets trapping at a minimal level. Adaptive halftoning and color REt settings are on.  
Off turns off trapping, adaptive halftoning, and color REt.  
Halftone options  
Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. You can select halftone settings  
for text, graphics, and photographs independently. The two halftone options are Smooth and Detail.  
The Smooth option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances  
photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Choose this option when uniform and smooth  
area fills are top priority.  
The Detail option is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or  
colors, or for images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Choose this option when sharp  
edges and details are top priority.  
144 Chapter 10 Use color  
ENWW  
           
NOTE: Some software programs convert text or graphics to bitmap images. In these cases, setting  
the color options for photographs also affects how text and graphics appear.  
Neutral Grays  
The Neutral Grays setting determines the method used for creating gray colors that are used in text,  
graphics, and photographs.  
Two values are available for the Neutral Grays setting:  
Black Only generates neutral colors (grays and black) using only black toner. This guarantees  
neutral colors without a color cast.  
4-Color generates neutral colors (grays and black) by combining all four toner colors. This method  
produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors, and it produces the darkest  
black.  
Print in grayscale  
Select the Print in Grayscale or Print Color as Gray option from the printer driver to print a document  
in black and white.  
Restrict color use  
This product includes a Restrict Color setting. A network administrator can use the setting to restrict  
user access to the color printing in order to conserve color toner. If you are unable to print in color, see  
your network administrator.  
Restrict color printing and copying from the control panel  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration and then touch Management.  
2. Touch Restrict Color Use.  
3. Touch Color printing access or Color copying access.  
4. Select one of the following options:  
Enable Color (default). This setting allows color-printing capabilities for all users.  
Color If Allowed. The setting allows the network administrator to allow color use for select  
users and/or applications. Use the embedded Web server to designate which users and/or  
applications can print in color (Color printing access only).  
Disable Color. This setting denies color-printing capabilities to all users.  
5. Touch Save.  
For more information about restricting and reporting color usage, go to www.hp.com/go/coloraccess.  
RGB Color (Color Themes)  
You can change RGB Color settings from the printer-driver. For more information on accessing the  
printer driver, see Set color options on page 141 for Windows and Set the color options on page 78 for  
Macintosh.  
ENWW  
Manage color 145  
             
Five values are available for the RGB Color setting:  
Select Default (sRGB) for most printing needs. This setting instructs the product to interpret RGB  
color as sRGB, which is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Consortium  
(W3C).  
Select Image optimization (sRGB) to enhance documents in which the content is mainly bitmap  
images, such as .GIF or .JPEG files. This setting instructs the product to use the best color matching  
for rendering sRGB, bitmap images. This setting has no effect on text or vector-based graphics.  
Using glossy paper in combination with this setting provides the maximum enhancement.  
Select AdobeRGB for documents that use the AdobeRGB color space rather than sRGB. For  
example, some digital cameras capture images in AdobeRGB, and documents that are produced  
with Adobe PhotoShop use the AdobeRGB color space. When printing from a professional software  
program that uses AdobeRGB, it is important that you turn off the color management in the software  
program and allow the product software to manage the color space.  
146 Chapter 10 Use color  
ENWW  
Match colors  
The process of matching product output color to your computer screen is quite complex because printers  
and computer monitors use different methods of producing color. Monitors display colors by light pixels  
using an RGB (red, green, blue) color process, but printers print colors using a CMYK (cyan, magenta,  
yellow, and black) process.  
Several factors can influence your ability to match printed colors to those on your monitor. These factors  
include:  
Paper  
Printer colorants (inks or toners for example)  
Printing process (inkjet, press, or laser technology for example)  
Overhead lighting  
Personal differences in perception of color  
Software programs  
Printer drivers  
Computer operating system  
Monitors and monitor settings  
Video cards and drivers  
Operating environment (humidity for example)  
Keep the above factors in mind when colors on your screen do not perfectly match your printed colors.  
For most users, the best method for matching colors on your screen to your product is to print sRGB  
colors.  
Sample book color matching  
The process for matching product output to preprinted sample books and standard color references is  
complex. In general, you can obtain a reasonably good match to a sample book if the inks used to create  
the sample book are cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. These are usually referred to as process color  
sample books.  
Some sample books are created from spot colors. Spot colors are specially created colorants. Many of  
these spot colors are outside of the range of the product. Most spot color sample books have companion  
process sample books that provide CMYK approximations to the spot color.  
Most process sample books will state which process standards were used to print the sample book. In  
most cases they will be SWOP, EURO, or DIC. To get optimal color matching to the process sample  
book, select the corresponding ink emulation from the product menu. If you cannot identify the process  
standard, use SWOP ink emulation.  
Printing color samples  
To use the color samples, select the color sample that is the closest match to the desired color. Use the  
sample’s color value in your software program to describe the object you wish to match. Colors may  
ENWW  
Match colors 147  
           
vary depending on paper type and the software program used. For more details on how to use the color  
samples, go to www.hp.com.  
Use the following procedure to print color samples at the product using the control panel:  
1. Touch Administration and then touch Information.  
2. Touch Sample pages/fonts and then touch CMYK samples or RGB samples to print the samples.  
PANTONE® color matching  
PANTONE has multiple color matching systems. PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM® is very popular  
and uses solid inks to generate a wide range of color hues and tints. See www.hp.com for details on  
how to use PANTONE Colors with this product.  
NOTE: PANTONE Colors generated might not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current  
PANTONE Publications for accurate color.  
148 Chapter 10 Use color  
ENWW  
   
Advanced color use  
HP ImageREt 4800  
HP ImageREt 4800 print technology is a system of innovative technologies developed exclusively by  
HP to deliver superior print quality. The HP ImageREt system sets itself apart from the industry by  
integrating technology advancements and optimizing each element of the print system. Several  
categories of HP ImageREt have been developed for a variety of user needs.  
The system uses key color-laser technologies, including image enhancements, smart supplies, and  
high-resolution imaging, to provide superior images for general office documents and marketing  
collateral. Optimized for printing on HP color laser high-gloss papers, HP Image REt 4800 provides  
superior results on all supported paper, and under a variety of environmental conditions.  
Paper selection  
For the best color and image quality, it is important to select the appropriate paper type from the product  
menu or from the front panel.  
sRGB  
Standard red-green-blue (sRGB) is a worldwide color standard originally developed by HP and Microsoft  
as a common color language for monitors, input devices (scanners, digital cameras), and output devices  
(products, printers, plotters). It is the default color space used for HP products, Microsoft operating  
systems, the Web, and most office software sold today. sRGB is representative of the typical Windows  
computer monitor today and the convergence standard for high-definition television.  
NOTE: Factors such as the type of monitor you use and the room’s lighting can affect the appearance  
of colors on your screen.  
The latest versions of Adobe PhotoShop, CorelDRAW™, Microsoft Office, and many other software  
programs use sRGB to communicate color. Most importantly, as the default color space in Microsoft  
operating systems, sRGB has gained broad adoption as a means to exchange color information between  
software programs and devices using a common definition that assures typical users will experience  
greatly improved color matching. sRGB improves your ability to match colors between the product, the  
computer monitor, and other input devices (scanner, digital camera) automatically, without the need to  
become a color expert.  
Print in four colors — CMYK  
Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (CMYK) are the inks used by a printing press. The process is often  
called four-color printing. CMYK data files are typically used by and originate from graphic arts (printing  
and publishing) environments. The product will accept CMYK colors through the PS printer driver. The  
product color-rendering of CMYK is designed to provide rich, saturated colors for text and graphics.  
CMYK ink set emulation (HP postscript level 3 emulation)  
The product color rendering of CMYK can be made to emulate several standard offset press ink sets.  
In some situations, the CMYK color values in an image or document might not be suited to the product.  
For example, a document might be optimized for another product. For best results, the CMYK values  
ENWW  
Advanced color use 149  
                     
should be adapted to the HP Color LaserJet CM6049f. Select the appropriate color input profile from  
the printer driver.  
Default CMYK+. HP CMYK+ technology produces optimal printing results for most printing jobs.  
Specification for Web Offset Publications (SWOP). Common ink standard in the United States  
and other countries/regions.  
Euroscale. Common ink standard in Europe and other countries/regions.  
Dainippon Ink and Chemical (DIC). Common ink standard in Japan and other countries/regions.  
Custom profile. Select this option to use a custom input profile to accurately control color output,  
for example, to emulate another HP color LaserJet product. To download color profiles, go to  
www.hp.com and search for "CM6049 mfp color profile".  
150 Chapter 10 Use color  
ENWW  
Use the Copy screen  
From the Home screen, touch Copy to view the Copy screen. Only the first six copy features are  
immediately visible. In order to view additional copy features, touch More Options.  
Set the default copy options  
You can use the administration menu to establish default settings that apply to all copy jobs. If necessary,  
you can override most settings for an individual job. After that job is complete, the product returns to the  
default settings.  
1. From the Home screen, scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Touch Default Job Options, and then touch Default Copy Options.  
3. Several options are available. You can configure defaults for all options, or for only some options.  
For information about each option, see Adjust the copy settings on page 153. The built-in Help  
system also provides an explanation of each option. Touch the Help button  
in the upper-right  
corner of the screen.  
4. To exit the administration menu, touch the Home button  
in the upper-left corner of the screen.  
Copy from the scanner glass  
Use the scanner glass to make as many as 999 copies of small, lightweight media (less than 60 g/m2  
or 16 lb) or heavy media (more than 105 g/m2 or 28 lb). This includes media such as receipts, newspaper  
clippings, photographs, old documents, worn documents, and books.  
Place original documents face-down on the glass. Align the corner of the original with the upper-left  
corner of the glass.  
To make copies by using the default copy options, use the numeric keypad on the control panel to select  
the number of copies, and press Start. To use customized settings, touch Copy. Specify the settings,  
and then press Start. For more information about using customized settings, see Adjust the copy settings  
Copy from the document feeder  
Use the document feeder to make as many as 999 copies of a document that has up to 50 pages  
(depending on the thickness of the pages). Place the document into the document feeder with the pages  
facing up.  
To make copies by using the default copy options, use the numeric keypad on the control panel to select  
the number of copies, and press Start. To use customized settings, touch Copy. Specify the settings,  
and then press Start. For more information about using customized settings, see Adjust the copy settings  
Before starting another copy job, retrieve the original document from the document-feeder output bin  
that is under the document feeder input tray, and retrieve the copies from the appropriate output bin.  
152 Chapter 11 Copy  
ENWW  
               
Adjust the copy settings  
The product offers several features so you can optimize copied output. These features are all available  
on the Copy screen.  
The Copy screen consists of several pages. From the first page, touch More Options to go to the next  
page. Then touch the up or down arrow buttons to scroll to other pages.  
For details about how to use an option, touch the option, and then touch the help  
button in the upper-  
right corner of the screen. The following table provides an overview of the copy options.  
NOTE: Depending on how the system administrator has configured the product, some of these options  
might not appear. The options in the table are listed in the order in which they can appear.  
Option name  
Description  
Sides  
Use this feature to indicate whether the original document is printed on one or both sides, and  
whether the copies should be printed on one or both sides.  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Color/Black  
Use this feature to reduce or enlarge the copied image on the page.  
Use this feature to choose black printing or color printing.  
Staple/Collate or Collate  
If the optional HP Stapler/Stacker/Separator is attached, the Staple/Collate option is available.  
Use this feature to set up options for stapling and assembling the pages in sets of copies.  
If the optional HP Stapler/Stacker/Separator is not attached, the Collate option is available. Use  
this feature to assemble each set of copied pages in the same order as the original document.  
Paper Selection  
Use this feature to select the tray that holds the size and type of paper that you want to use.  
Image Adjustment  
Use this feature to improve the overall quality of the copy. For example, you can adjust the  
darkness and sharpness, and you can use the Background Cleanup setting to remove faint  
images from the background or to remove a light background color.  
Content Orientation  
Use this feature to specify the way the content of the original page is placed on the page: portrait  
or landscape.  
Output Bin  
Use this feature to select an output bin for the copies.  
Optimize Text/Picture  
Use this feature to optimize the output for a particular type of content. You can optimize the  
output for text or printed pictures, or you can manually adjust the values.  
Pages per Sheet  
Original Size  
Book Copy  
Use this feature to copy multiple pages onto one sheet of paper.  
Use this feature to describe the page size of the original document.  
Use this feature to scan and print pages from a book.  
Booklet Format  
Use this feature to copy two or more pages onto one sheet of paper so you can fold the sheets  
in the center to form a booklet.  
Edge-To-Edge  
Job Build  
Use this feature to avoid shadows that can appear along the edges of copies when the original  
document is printed close to the edges. Combine this feature with the Reduce/Enlarge feature  
to ensure that the entire page is printed on the copies.  
Use this feature to combine several sets of original documents into one copy job. Also use this  
feature to copy an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can  
accommodate at one time.  
ENWW  
Adjust the copy settings 153  
 
Copy two-sided documents  
Two-sided documents can be copied manually or automatically.  
Copying two-sided documents manually  
Copies resulting from this procedure are printed on one side, and need to be hand-collated.  
1. Load the documents to be copied into the document feeder input tray with the first page facing up,  
and with the top of the page leading into the document feeder.  
2. Touch Start Copy. The odd-numbered pages are copied and printed.  
3. Remove the stack from the document feeder output tray and reload the stack with the last page  
facing up, and with the top of the page leading into the document feeder.  
4. Touch Start Copy. The even-numbered pages are copied and printed.  
5. Collate the odd- and even-numbered printed copies.  
Copy two-sided documents automatically  
The default copy setting is one-sided to one-sided. Use the following procedures to change the setting  
so you can copy from or to documents that are two-sided.  
Make two-sided copies from one-sided documents  
1. Load the documents to be copied into the document feeder with the first page facing up, and with  
the top of the page leading.  
2. On the control panel, touch Copy.  
3. Touch Sides.  
4. Touch 1-sided original, 2-sided output.  
5. Touch OK.  
6. Touch Start Copy.  
Make two-sided copies from two-sided documents  
1. Load the documents to be copied into the document feeder with the first page facing up, and with  
the top of the page leading.  
2. On the control panel, touch Copy.  
3. Touch Sides.  
154 Chapter 11 Copy  
ENWW  
         
4. Touch 2-sided original, 2-sided output.  
5. Touch OK.  
6. Touch Start Copy.  
Make one-sided copies from two-sided documents  
1. Load the documents to be copied into the document feeder with the first page facing up, and with  
the top of the page leading.  
2. On the control panel, touch Copy.  
3. Touch Sides.  
4. Touch 2-sided original, 1-sided output.  
5. Touch OK.  
6. Touch Start Copy.  
ENWW  
Copy two-sided documents 155  
Copy mixed-size originals  
You can copy original documents that are printed on different sizes of paper as long as the sheets of  
paper have one common dimension. For example, you could combine letter and legal sizes, or you could  
combine A4 and A5 sizes.  
1. Arrange the sheets in the original document so they all have the same width.  
2. Place the sheets face-up into the document feeder, and adjust both paper guides against the  
document.  
3. From the Home screen, touch Copy.  
4. Touch Original Size.  
NOTE: If this option is not on the first screen, touch More Options until the option appears.  
5. Select Mixed Ltr/Lgl, and then touch OK.  
6. Touch Start Copy.  
156 Chapter 11 Copy  
ENWW  
 
Change the copy-collation setting  
You can set the device to automatically collate multiple copies into sets. For example, if you are making  
two copies of three pages and the automatic collation is on, the pages print in this order: 1,2,3,1,2,3. If  
automatic collation is off, the pages print in this order: 1,1,2,2,3,3.  
To use the automatic collation, the original document size must fit into the memory. If it does not, the  
device makes only one copy and a message appears notifying you of the change. If that happens, use  
one of the following methods to finish the job:  
Split the job into smaller jobs that contain fewer pages.  
Make only one copy of the document at a time.  
Turn off the automatic collation.  
The collation setting you select is in effect for all copies until you change the setting. The default setting  
for automatic copy collation is On.  
1. On the control panel, touch Copy.  
2. Touch Staple/Collate or Collate.  
3. Touch Off.  
4. Touch OK.  
ENWW  
Change the copy-collation setting 157  
 
Copy photos and books  
Copy a photo  
NOTE: Photos should be copied from the flatbed scanner, not from the document feeder.  
1. Lift the lid and place the photo on the flatbed scanner with the picture-side down and the upper-  
left corner of the photo in the upper-left corner of the glass.  
2. Gently close the lid.  
3. Touch Copy.  
4. Touch Optimize Text/Picture and select Photograph.  
5. Touch Start Copy.  
Copy a book  
1. Place the book face down on the glass with the top edge toward the rear of the glass. Align the  
book spine with the book icon  
along the top edge of the glass.  
2. Touch Copy.  
3. Scroll to and touch Book Copy .  
4. Touch Book Copy On and then touch OK.  
5. Select the number of copies to make and adjust other settings as needed.  
6. Touch Start Copy, or press the Start button on the control panel.  
7. The following 3 options are available when Start Copy is touched:  
Copy both pages copies the images on both the left and right side of the spine  
Skip left page copies the image on the right side of the spine only  
Skip right page copies the image on the left side of the spine only  
8. Touch Scan.  
9. After the last page is scanned, touch Finish.  
158 Chapter 11 Copy  
ENWW  
     
Combine copy jobs by using Job Build  
Use this feature to combine several sets of original documents into one copy job. Also use this feature  
to copy an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can accommodate at one  
time.  
1. Touch Copy.  
2. Scroll to and touch Job Build.  
3. Touch Job Build On.  
4. Touch OK.  
5. If necessary, select the desired copy options.  
6. Touch Start Copy. After each page is scanned, the control panel prompts you for more pages.  
7. If the job contains more pages, load the next page, and then touch Scan.  
The product temporarily saves all the scanned images. The product will begin printing copies when  
it has enough information to begin. Touch Finish to finish printing the copies.  
NOTE: In Job Build, if you scan the first page of a document by using the document feeder, then you  
must scan all of the pages in that document by using the document feeder. If you scan the first page of  
a document by using the scanner glass, then you must scan all of the pages in that document by using  
the scanner glass.  
ENWW  
Combine copy jobs by using Job Build 159  
   
Cancel a copy job  
1. Touch the Stop button on the control panel and then touch the job from the list.  
2. Touch Cancel Job and then touch OK.  
NOTE: If you cancel a copy job, clear the document from the flatbed scanner or from the automatic  
document feeder.  
160 Chapter 11 Copy  
ENWW  
 
Configure e-mail settings  
The product offers color-scanning and digital-sending capabilities. By using the control panel, you can  
scan black-and-white or color documents and send them to an e-mail address as an e-mail attachment.  
To use digital sending, the product must be connected to a local area network (LAN).  
NOTE: The e-mail icon is not shown on the control panel if e-mail is not configured.  
Before you can send a document to e-mail, you must configure the product.  
NOTE: The instructions that follow are for configuring the product at the control panel. You can also  
perform these procedures by using the embedded Web server. For more information, see  
Supported protocols  
The HP Color LaserJet CM6049f MFP supports Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) and Lightweight  
Directory Access Protocol (LDAP).  
SMTP  
SMTP is a set of rules that define the interaction between programs that send and receive e-mail.  
In order for the device to send documents to e-mail, it must be connected to a LAN that has access  
to an e-mail server that supports SMTP. The SMTP server must also have Internet access.  
If you are using a LAN connection, contact your system administrator to obtain the IP address or  
host name for your SMTP server. If you are connecting through a DSL or cable connection, contact  
the internet service provider to obtain the SMTP server IP address.  
LDAP  
LDAP is used to gain access to a database of information. When the device uses LDAP, it searches  
a global list of e-mail addresses. As you begin to type the e-mail address, LDAP uses an auto-  
complete feature that supplies a list of e-mail addresses that match the characters you type. As  
you type additional characters, the list of matching e-mail addresses becomes smaller.  
The device supports LDAP, but a connection to an LDAP server is not required in order for the  
device to be able to send to e-mail.  
NOTE: If you need to change the LDAP settings, you must change them by using the embedded  
Web server. For more information, see Embedded Web server on page 178, or see the Embedded  
Web Server User Guide.  
Configure e-mail server settings  
Find the SMTP gateway  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration  
2. Touch Initial Setup.  
3. Touch E-mail Setup, and then touch Find Send Gateways.  
4. Touch Find.  
162 Chapter 12 Scan and send to e-mail  
ENWW  
             
Configure the SMTP gateway address  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.  
2. Touch Initial Setup.  
3. Touch E-mail Setup, and then touch SMTP Gateway.  
4. Type the SMTP gateway address, either as an IP address or as a fully qualified domain name. If  
you do not know the IP address or domain name, contact the network administrator.  
5. Touch Save.  
Test the SMTP settings  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.  
2. Touch Initial Setup.  
3. Touch E-mail Setup, and then touch Test.  
If the configuration is correct, Gateways OK appears on the control-panel display.  
If the first test was successful, send an e-mail to yourself by using the digital-send feature. If you receive  
the e-mail, you have successfully configured the digital-sending feature.  
If you do not receive the e-mail, use these actions to resolve issues with the digital-sending software:  
Check the SMTP and address to make sure that you typed them correctly.  
Print a configuration page. Verify that the SMTP gateway address is correct.  
Make sure that the network is operating correctly. Send an e-mail to yourself from a computer. If  
you receive the e-mail, the network is operating correctly. If you do not receive the e-mail, contact  
your network administrator or Internet service provider (ISP).  
ENWW  
Configure e-mail settings 163  
   
Use the Send E-mail screen  
Use the touchscreen to navigate through the options on the Send E-mail screen.  
1
Send E-mail button  
Touching this button scans the document and sends an e-mail file to the provided e-mail  
addresses.  
2
3
Home button  
From: field  
Touching this button opens the Home screen.  
Touch this field to open the keyboard, and then type your e-mail address. If the system  
administrator has configured the device to do so, this field might automatically insert a default  
address.  
4
To: field  
Touch this field to open the keyboard, and then type the e-mail addresses of those whom you  
want to receive the scanned document.  
5
6
7
Subject: field  
Touch this field to open the keyboard, and then type a subject title.  
More Options button  
Scroll bar  
Touch this button to change certain e-mail settings for the current scan job.  
Use the scroll bar to view and set up the CC:, BCC:, Message, and File Name fields. Touch any  
of those fields to open the keyboard and add the necessary information.  
8
9
Address book buttons Touch these buttons to use the address book to populate the To:, CC:, or BCC: fields. For more  
Help button  
Touch this button for control-panel help. For more information, see Use the control panel  
10 Error/warning button  
This button appears only when there is an error or warning in the status line area. Touch it to open  
a pop-up screen that will help you resolve the error or warning.  
164 Chapter 12 Scan and send to e-mail  
ENWW  
   
Perform basic e-mail functions  
The product e-mail feature offers the following benefits:  
Sends documents to multiple e-mail addresses, saving time and delivery costs.  
Delivers files in black-and-white or in color. Files can be sent in different file formats that the  
recipient can manipulate.  
With e-mail, documents are scanned into the product memory and sent to an e-mail address or multiple  
addresses as an e-mail attachment. Digital documents can be sent in several graphics formats, such  
as .TFF and .JPG, which allows recipients to manipulate the document file in various programs to meet  
their specific needs. Documents arrive in near-original quality, and then can be printed, stored, or  
forwarded.  
In order to use the e-mail feature, the product needs to be connected to a valid SMTP local area network  
that includes Internet access.  
Load documents  
You can scan a document by using either the glass or the ADF. The glass and ADF can accommodate  
Letter-, Executive-, A4-, and A5-size originals. The ADF can also accommodate Legal-size originals.  
Smaller originals, receipts, irregular and worn documents, stapled documents, previously folded  
documents, and photographs should be scanned by using the glass. Multiple-page documents can be  
scanned easily by using the ADF.  
Send documents  
The product scans both black-and-white and color originals. You can use default settings or change the  
scanning preferences and file formats. The following are the default settings:  
Color  
PDF (requires the recipient to have an Adobe Acrobat viewer to view the e-mail attachment)  
For information about changing the settings for the current job, see Change e-mail settings for the current  
Send a document  
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the ADF.  
2. From the Home screen, touch E-mail.  
3. If prompted, type your user name and password.  
4. Complete the From:, To:, and Subject: fields. Scroll down and complete the CC:, and BCC: fields  
if appropriate. Your user name or other default information might appear in the From: field. If so,  
you might not be able to change it.  
5. (Optional) Touch More Options to change the settings for the document that you are sending (for  
example, the document’s original size). If you are sending a two-sided document, you should select  
Sides and an option with a two-sided original.  
6. Press Start to begin sending.  
7. When you are finished, remove the original document from the scanner glass or ADF.  
ENWW  
Perform basic e-mail functions 165  
             
Use the auto-complete function  
When you type characters into the To:, CC:, or From: fields on the Send E-mail screen, the auto-  
complete function is activated. As you type the required address or name by using the keyboard screen,  
the device automatically searches the address book list and completes the address or name by using  
the first match. You can then select that name by touching Enter, or continue typing the name until auto-  
complete finds the correct entry. If you type a character that does not match any entry in the list, the  
auto-complete text is removed from the display to indicate that you are typing an address that is not in  
the address book.  
Use the address book  
You can send e-mail to a list of recipients by using the address book feature of the product. See your  
system administrator for information about configuring address lists.  
NOTE: You can also use the embedded Web server (EWS) to create and manage the e-mail address  
book. The EWS e-mail address book can be used to add, edit, or delete single e-mail addresses or e-  
mail distribution lists. For more information, see Embedded Web server on page 178.  
Create a recipient list  
1. From the Home screen, touch E-mail.  
2. Complete one of the following steps:  
Touch To: to open the keyboard screen, and then type the recipients' e-mail addresses.  
Separate multiple e-mail addresses with a semicolon or by touching Enter on the touchscreen.  
Use the address book.  
a. On the Send E-mail screen, touch the address book button  
to open the address book.  
b. Navigate the entries in the address book by using the scroll bar. Hold down the arrow to  
scroll quickly through the list.  
c. Highlight the name to select a recipient, and then touch the arrow button  
.
You can also select a distribution list by touching the drop-down list at the top of the  
screen and then touching All, or add a recipient from a local list by touching Local in the  
drop-down list. Highlight the appropriate names, and then touch the arrow button  
add the name to your list of recipients.  
to  
You can remove a recipient from your list by scrolling to highlight the recipient, and then  
touching the remove button in the middle of the screen.  
3. The names in the recipient list are placed in the text line of the keyboard screen. If you want, you  
can add a recipient that is not found in the address book by typing the e-mail address on the  
keyboard. After you are satisfied with your recipient list, touch OK.  
4. Touch OK.  
5. Finish typing information in the CC: and Subject: fields on the Send E-mail screen, if necessary.  
You can check the list of recipients by touching the down arrow in the To: text line.  
6. Press Start.  
166 Chapter 12 Scan and send to e-mail  
ENWW  
           
Use the local address book  
Use the local address book to store frequently-used e-mail addresses. The local address book can be  
shared between devices that use the same server to gain access to the HP Digital Sending software.  
You can use the address book when you type e-mail addresses in the From:, To:, CC:, or BCC: fields.  
You can also add or delete addresses in the address book.  
To open the address book, touch the address book button  
.
Add e-mail addresses to the local address book  
1. Touch Local.  
2. Touch the add button  
.
3. (Optional) Touch the Name field, and in the keyboard that appears type a name for the new entry.  
Touch OK.  
The name is the alias for the e-mail address. If you do not type an alias name, the alias will be the  
e-mail address itself.  
4. Touch the Address field, and in the keyboard that appears type the e-mail address for the new  
entry. Touch OK.  
Delete e-mail addresses from the local address book  
You can delete e-mail addresses that you no longer use.  
NOTE: To change an e-mail address, you must first delete the address and then add the corrected  
address as a new address in the local address book.  
1. Touch Local.  
2. Touch the e-mail address that you want to delete.  
3. Touch the remove button  
in the lower right corner.  
The following confirmation message appears: Do you want to delete the selected address(es)?  
4. Touch Yes to delete the e-mail address(es) or touch No to return to the Address Book screen.  
ENWW  
Use the address book 167  
       
Change e-mail settings for the current job  
Use the More Options button to change the following e-mail settings for the current print job:  
Button  
Description  
Document File Type Touch this button to change the type of file the device creates after scanning the document.  
Output Quality  
Touch this button to increase or decrease the print quality of the file being scanned. A higher quality  
setting produces a larger file size.  
Resolution  
Touch this button to change the scan resolution. A higher resolution setting produces a larger file size.  
Touch this button to determine whether you will scan the document in color or in black-and-white.  
Touch this button to indicate if the original document is one-sided or two-sided.  
Color/Black  
Original Sides  
Content Orientation Touch this button to select either the portrait or landscape orientation for the original.  
Original Size  
Touch this button to select the size of the document: letter, A4, legal, or mixed letter/legal.  
Optimize Text/  
Picture  
Touch this button to change the scanning procedure based on the type of document that you are  
scanning.  
Job Build  
Touch this button to activate or deactivate the Job Build mode, which enables you to scan several small  
scan jobs and send them as one file.  
Image Adjustment  
Touch this button to change the darkness and sharpness settings, or to clean up background clutter on  
the original.  
168 Chapter 12 Scan and send to e-mail  
ENWW  
 
Scan to a folder  
If the system administrator has made the feature available, the device can scan a file and send it to a  
folder on the network. Supported operating systems for folder destinations include Windows 2000,  
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Vista.  
NOTE: You might be required to supply a user name and password in order to use this option, or to  
send to certain folders. See your system administrator for more information.  
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-down in the ADF.  
2. From the Home screen, touch Network Folder.  
3. In the Quick Access Folders list, select the folder in which you want to save the document.  
4. Touch the File Name field to open the keyboard pop-up screen, and then type the file name.  
5. Touch Send to Network Folder.  
ENWW  
Scan to a folder 169  
   
Scan to a workflow destination  
NOTE: This device feature is provided by the optional Digital Sending Software.  
If the system administrator has enabled the workflow functionality, you can scan a document and send  
it to a custom workflow destination. A workflow destination gives you the ability to send additional  
information, along with the scanned document, to a specified network or file transfer protocol (FTP)  
location. Prompts for specific information appear on the control-panel display. The system administrator  
can also designate a printer as a workflow destination, which allows you to scan a document and then  
send it directly to a network printer for printing.  
1. Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the ADF.  
2. From the Home screen, touch Workflow.  
3. Select the destination to which you want to scan.  
4. In the Text Field field, type the data that you want to accompany the file, and then touch Send  
Workflow.  
170 Chapter 12 Scan and send to e-mail  
ENWW  
   
13 Fax  
ENWW  
171  
 
Analog fax  
When the analog fax accessory is installed, the product can function as a standalone fax machine.  
The HP Color LaserJet CM6049f comes with a fax accessory already installed. Specifications for the  
Analog Fax Accessory are available in the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide. The  
Analog Fax Accessory 300 Fax Guide and the Analog Fax Accessory 300 Send Fax Driver Guide are  
Connect the fax accessory to a phone line  
When connecting the fax accessory to a phone line, ensure that the phone line being used for the fax  
accessory is a dedicated line that is not used by any other devices. Also, this line should be an analog  
line because the fax will not function correctly if it is connected to some digital PBX systems. If you are  
not sure whether you have an analog or digital phone line, contact your telecom provider.  
NOTE: HP recommends using the phone cord that comes with the fax accessory to ensure that the  
accessory functions correctly.  
Follow these instructions to connect the fax accessory to a phone jack.  
1. Locate the phone cord that is included with the fax accessory kit. Connect one end of the phone  
cord into the fax accessory phone jack that is on the formatter. Push the connector until it clicks.  
CAUTION: Be sure to connect the phone line to the fax accessory port, which is located in the  
center of the formatter. Do not connect the phone line to the HP Jetdirect port, which is nearer the  
bottom of the formatter.  
2. Connect the other end of the phone cord into the phone jack on the wall. Push the connector until  
it clicks or until it is securely seated. Because different types of connectors are used in different  
countries/regions, the connector might not make an audible click.  
Configure and use the fax features  
Before you can use the fax features, you must configure them in the control-panel menus. For complete  
information about configuring and using the fax accessory, and for information about troubleshooting  
problems with the fax accessory, see the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide. This  
guide is provided with the fax accessory.  
Use the Send Fax driver to send a fax from a computer without going to the product control panel. See  
the HP LaserJet MFP Analog Fax Accessory 300 Send Fax Driver Guide for more information.  
172 Chapter 13 Fax  
ENWW  
       
The HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide and HP LaserJet MFP Analog Fax Accessory  
300 Send Fax Driver Guide are both available at www.hp.com/go/mfpfaxaccessory300.  
ENWW  
Analog fax 173  
Digital fax  
Digital faxing is available when you install the optional HP Digital Sending Software. For information  
about ordering this software, go to www.hp.com/go/digitalsending  
With digital faxing, the product does not need to be connected directly to a phone line. Instead, the  
product can send a fax in one of three ways:  
LAN fax sends faxes through a third-party fax provider.  
Microsoft Windows 2000 fax is a fax modem and Digital Sender Module on a computer that allows  
the computer to operate as a turnkey gateway fax.  
Internet fax uses an Internet fax provider to process faxes, and the fax is delivered on a traditional  
fax machine or sent to the user’s e-mail.  
For complete information about using digital faxing, see the documentation that is provided with the  
HP Digital Sending Software.  
174 Chapter 13 Fax  
ENWW  
   
Information pages  
Information pages provide details about the device and its current configuration. The following table  
provides the instructions for printing the information pages.  
Page description  
Menu map  
How to print the page from the product control panel  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.  
2. Touch Information.  
Shows the control-panel menus and  
available settings.  
3. Touch Configuration/status Pages.  
4. Touch Administration Menu Map.  
5. Touch Print.  
The content of the menu map varies, depending on the options currently installed in  
the device.  
For a complete list of control panel menus and possible values, see Use the control  
Configuration page  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.  
2. Touch Information.  
Shows device settings and installed  
accessories.  
3. Touch Configuration/Status Pages.  
4. Touch Configuration Page.  
5. Touch Print.  
NOTE: If the device contains an HP Jetdirect print server or an optional hard disk  
drive, additional configuration pages print that provide information about those  
devices.  
Supplies status page  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.  
2. Touch Information.  
Shows print-cartridge toner levels.  
3. Touch Configuration/status Pages.  
4. Touch Supplies Status Page.  
5. Touch Print.  
NOTE: If you are using non-HP supplies, the supplies status page might not show  
the remaining life for those supplies.  
Usage page  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.  
2. Touch Information.  
Shows a page count for each size of  
paper printed, the number of one-sided  
(simplexed) or two-sided (duplexed)  
pages, and the average percentage of  
coverage.  
3. Touch Configuration/status Pages.  
4. Touch Usage Page.  
5. Touch Print.  
176 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
         
Page description  
How to print the page from the product control panel  
Color usage job log  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration  
2. Touch Information  
3. Touch Configuration/status Pages  
4. Touch Color Usage Job Log  
5. Touch Print  
File directory  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.  
2. Touch Information.  
Contains information for any mass  
storage devices, such as flash drives,  
memory cards, or hard disks, that are  
installed in the device.  
3. Touch Configuration/status Pages.  
4. Touch File Directory.  
5. Touch Print.  
Fax reports  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.  
Five reports show fax activity, fax calls, 2. Touch Information.  
billing codes, blocked fax numbers, and  
3. Touch Fax Reports.  
speed-dial numbers.  
4. Touch one of the following buttons to print the corresponding report:  
NOTE: Fax reports are available only  
on device models that have fax  
capabilities.  
Fax Activity Log  
Fax Call Report  
Billing Codes Report  
Blocked Fax List  
Speed Dial List  
5. Touch Print.  
For more information, see the fax guide that came with the device.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.  
2. Touch Information.  
Font lists  
Shows which fonts are currently  
installed in the device.  
3. Touch Sample Pages/Fonts.  
4. Touch one of the following buttons to print the corresponding report:  
Demonstration Page  
RGB Samples  
CMYK Samples  
PCL Font List  
PS Font List  
5. Touch Print.  
NOTE: The font lists also show which fonts reside on a hard disk accessory or  
DIMM.  
ENWW  
Information pages 177  
     
Embedded Web server  
Use the embedded Web server to view product and network status and to manage printing functions  
from your computer instead of from the product control panel. The following are examples of what you  
can do using the embedded Web server:  
Determine the remaining life for all supplies and order new ones.  
View and change tray configurations.  
View and change the product control-panel menu configuration.  
View and print internal pages.  
Receive notification of product and supplies events.  
View and change network configuration.  
To use the embedded Web server, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later or Netscape  
6.2 or later for Windows, Mac OS, and Linux (Netscape only). Netscape Navigator 4.7 is required for  
HP-UX 10 and HP-UX 11. The embedded Web server works when the product is connected to an IP-  
based network. The embedded Web server does not support IPX-based product connections. You do  
not have to have Internet access to open and use the embedded Web server.  
When the product is connected to the network, the embedded Web server is automatically available.  
NOTE: For complete information about using the embedded Web server, see the Embedded Web  
Server User Guide.  
Open the embedded Web server by using a network connection  
1. In a supported Web browser on your computer, type the device IP address or host name in the  
address/URL field. To find the IP address or host name, print a configuration page. See Information  
NOTE: After you open the URL, you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the  
future.  
2. The embedded Web server has four tabs that contain settings and information about the device:  
the Information tab, the Settings tab, the Networking tab, and the Digital Sending tab. Click the  
tab that you want to view.  
See Embedded Web server sections on page 179 for more information about each tab.  
178 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
       
Embedded Web server sections  
Tab or section  
Options  
Information tab  
Device Status: Shows the device status and shows the life remaining of HP supplies,  
with 0% indicating that a supply is empty. The page also shows the type and size of  
print paper set for each tray. To change the default settings, click Change  
Settings.  
Provides device, status, and  
configuration information  
Configuration Page: Shows the information found on the configuration page.  
Supplies Status: Shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with 0 percent indicating  
that a supply is empty. This page also provides supplies part numbers. To order new  
supplies, contact your dealer.  
Event log: Shows a list of all device events and errors.  
Usage page: Shows a summary of the number of pages the device has printed,  
grouped by size and type.  
Device Information: Shows the device network name, address, and model  
information. To change these entries, click Device Information on the Settings tab.  
Control Panel: Shows messages from the device control panel, such as Ready or  
Sleep mode on.  
Print: Allows you to send print jobs to the device.  
ENWW  
Embedded Web server 179  
   
Tab or section  
Options  
Settings tab  
Configure Device: Allows you to configure device settings. This page contains the  
traditional menus found on devices using a control-panel display.  
Provides the ability to configure the  
device from your computer  
E-mail Server: Network only. Used in conjunction with the Alerts page to set up  
incoming and outgoing e-mail, as well as to set e-mail alerts.  
Alerts: Network only. Allows you to set up to receive e-mail alerts for various device  
and supplies events.  
AutoSend: Allows you to configure the device to send automated e-mails regarding  
device configuration and supplies to specific e-mail addresses.  
Security: Allows you to set a password that must be entered to gain access to the  
Settings and Networking tabs. Enable and disable certain features of the  
embedded Web server.  
Authentication Manager: Allows you to determine which device functions will  
require a user to provide log-in information in order to use those functions.  
LDAP Authentication: Allows you to configure a Lightweight Directory Access  
Protocol (LDAP) server to limit device access to certain users. The LDAP server will  
require a user to provide log-in information in order to gain access to the device.  
Edit Other Links: Allows you to add or customize a link to another Web site. This  
link is displayed in the Other Links area on all embedded Web server pages.  
Device Information: Allows you to name the device and assign an asset number to  
it. Enter the name and e-mail address for the primary contact who will receive  
information about the device.  
Language: Allows you to determine the language in which to display the embedded  
Web server information.  
Date & Time: Allows time synchronization with a network time server.  
Wake Time: Allows you to set or edit a wake time for the device.  
NOTE: The Settings tab can be password-protected. If this device is on a network,  
always consult with the system administrator before changing settings on this tab.  
180 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
 
Tab or section  
Options  
Digital Sending tab  
Use the pages on the Digital Sending tab to configure the digital-sending features.  
NOTE: If the product is configured to use the optional HP Digital Sending Software, the  
options on these tabs are not available. Instead, all digital-sending configuration is  
performed by using the HP Digital Sending Software.  
General. Set up contact information for the system administrator.  
Send to E-mail. Configure the e-mail settings for digital sending. You can specify  
the SMTP server, the default "From" address, and the default subject. You can also  
set the maximum file size that is allowed for attachments.  
E-mail Address Book. The E-mail Address Book page enables you to add e-mail  
addresses into the product one at a time, and to edit e-mail addresses that have  
already been saved in the product. You can also use the Import/Export tab to load a  
large list of frequently-used e-mail addresses on to the product all at once, rather  
than adding them one at a time.  
Import/Export. Use this tab to import or export .CSV files containing e-mail  
addresses, fax numbers, or user records, so that they can be accessed on this  
product. You can also export e-mail, fax, or user records from the device into a file  
on your computer. You can then use this file as a data backup, or you can use it to  
import the records onto another HP device.  
Log. View the digital-sending activity log for the product. The log contains digital-  
sending job information, including any errors that occur.  
Preferences. Configure digital-sending defaults such as the default page-size and  
the default settings-reset delay. You can also configure these settings by using the  
product control-panel menus.  
Fax tab  
The Fax tab contains options to configure and use the fax capabilities of the product. For  
additional information about fax functions, see the Fax User Guide.  
Use the Fax Settings screen to configure the send-to-fax features for the product.  
The Fax Address Book page enables you to add fax numbers into the product one  
at a time, and to edit fax numbers that have already been saved in the product. You  
can also use the Import/Export feature on the Digital Sending tab to load a large list  
of frequently-used fax numbers on to the device all at once, rather than adding them  
one at a time.  
Use the Fax Speed Dials screen to add, edit, or delete fax speed dial entries to and  
from the product. You can use fax speed dials to store frequently used fax numbers  
or lists of up to 100 fax numbers. Up to 100 speed dial entries can be configured.  
Networking tab  
Network administrators can use this tab to control network-related settings for the device  
when it is connected to an IP-based network. This tab does not appear if the device is  
directly connected to a computer, or if the device is connected to a network using anything  
other than an HP Jetdirect print server.  
Provides the ability to change  
network settings from your  
computer  
NOTE: The Networking tab can be password-protected.  
ENWW  
Embedded Web server 181  
   
Use HP Web Jetadmin software  
HP Web Jetadmin is a Web-based software solution for remotely installing, monitoring, and  
troubleshooting network-connected peripherals. The intuitive browser interface simplifies cross-platform  
management of a wide range of devices, including HP and non-HP devices. Management is proactive,  
allowing network administrators the ability to resolve issues before users are affected. Download this  
free, enhanced-management software at www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin_software.  
NOTE: HP Web Jetadmin 10.0 or later is required for full support of this product.  
To obtain plug-ins to HP Web Jetadmin, click plug-ins, and then click the download link that is next to  
the name of the plug-in that you want. The HP Web Jetadmin software can automatically notify you  
when new plug-ins are available. On the Product Update page, follow the directions to automatically  
connect to the HP Web site.  
If installed on a host server, HP Web Jetadmin is available to any client through a supported Web  
browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 for Windows or Netscape Navigator 7.1 for Linux.  
Browse to the HP Web Jetadmin host.  
NOTE: Browsers must be Java-enabled. Browsing from an Apple PC is not supported.  
182 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
   
Security features  
Secure the embedded Web server  
Assign a password for access to the embedded Web server so that unauthorized users cannot change  
the product settings.  
1. Open the embedded Web server. See Embedded Web server on page 178.  
2. Click the Settings tab.  
3. On the left side of the window, click Security.  
4. Type the password next to New Password, and type it again next to Verify Password.  
5. Click Apply. Make note of the password and store it in a safe place.  
Secure Disk Erase  
To protect deleted data from unauthorized access on the product hard drive, use the Secure Disk Erase  
feature. This feature can securely erase print and copy jobs from the hard drive.  
Secure Disk Erase offers the following levels of disk security:  
Non-Secure Fast Erase. This is a simple file-table erase function. Access to the file is removed,  
but actual data is retained on the disk until it is overwritten by subsequent data-storage operations.  
This is the fastest mode. Non-Secure Fast Erase is the default erase mode.  
Secure Fast Erase. Access to the file is removed, and the data is overwritten with a fixed identical  
character pattern. This is slower than Non-Secure Fast Erase, but all data is overwritten. Secure  
Fast Erase meets the U.S. Department of Defense 5220-22.M requirements for the clearing of disk  
media.  
Secure Sanitizing Erase. This level is similar to the Secure Fast Erase mode. In addition, data is  
repetitively overwritten by using an algorithm that prevents any residual data persistence. This  
mode will impact performance. Secure Sanitizing Erase meets the U.S. Department of Defense  
5220-22.M requirements for the sanitization of disk media.  
Data affected  
Data affected (covered) by the Secure Disk Erase feature includes temporary files that are created  
during the print and copying process, stored jobs, proof and hold jobs, disk-based fonts, disk-based  
macros (forms), stored fax files, address books, and HP and third-party applications.  
NOTE: Stored jobs will be securely overwritten only when they have been deleted through the  
Retrieve Job menu on the product after the appropriate erase mode has been set.  
This feature will not impact data that is stored on flash-based product non-volatile RAM (NVRAM) that  
is used to store default settings, page counts, and similar data. This feature does not affect data that is  
stored on a system RAM disk (if one is used). This feature does not impact data that is stored on the  
flash-based system boot RAM.  
Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode does not overwrite previous data on the disk, nor does it  
immediately perform a full-disk sanitization. Changing the Secure Disk Erase mode changes how the  
product cleans up temporary data for jobs after the erase mode has been changed.  
ENWW  
Security features 183  
             
Gain access to Secure Disk Erase  
Use HP Web Jetadmin to gain access to and set the Secure Disk Erase feature.  
Additional Information  
For additional information about the HP Secure Disk Erase feature, go to www.hp.com/go/  
DSS authentication  
Optional Digital Sending Software (DSS) for the product is available for purchase separately. The  
software provides an advanced sending program that contains an authentication process. This process  
requires users to type a user identification and a password before they can use any of the DSS features  
that require authentication.  
Lock the control-panel menus  
To prevent someone from changing the product configuration, you can lock the control-panel menus.  
This prevents unauthorized users from changing the configuration settings such as the SMTP server.  
The following procedure describes how to restrict access to the control-panel menus by using the  
HP Web Jetadmin software. (See Use HP Web Jetadmin software on page 182.)  
1. Open the HP Web Jetadmin program.  
2. Open the DEVICE MANAGEMENT folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate  
to the DEVICE LISTS folder.  
3. Select the product.  
4. In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Configure.  
5. Select Security from the Configuration Categories list.  
6. Type a Device Password.  
7. In the Control Panel Access section, select Maximum Lock. This prevents unauthorized users  
from gaining access to configuration settings.  
184 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
         
Set the real-time clock  
Use the real-time clock feature to set the date and time settings. The date and time information is  
attached to stored print, fax, and digital-send jobs, so you can identify the most recent versions of stored  
print jobs.  
Set the date format  
1. On the control panel, scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Touch Time/Scheduling.  
3. Touch Date/Time.  
4. Touch Date Format.  
5. Touch the desired format.  
6. Touch Save.  
Set the date  
1. On the control panel, scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Touch Time/Scheduling.  
3. Touch Date/Time.  
4. Touch Date.  
5. Touch the appropriate options to set the correct month, date of the month, and the year.  
6. Touch Save.  
Set the time format  
1. On the control panel, scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Touch Time/Scheduling.  
3. Touch Date/Time.  
4. Touch Time Format.  
5. Touch the appropriate format.  
6. Touch Save.  
Set the time  
1. On the control panel, scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Touch Time/Scheduling.  
3. Touch Date/Time.  
4. Touch Time.  
ENWW  
Set the real-time clock 185  
           
5. Touch the appropriate options to set the correct hour, minute, and AM/PM setting.  
6. Touch Save.  
186 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
Manage supplies  
Use genuine HP print cartridges for the best printing results.  
Print-cartridge storage  
Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it.  
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few  
minutes.  
HP policy on non-HP print cartridges  
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or  
remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control their  
quality.  
To install a new HP print cartridge, see Change print cartridges on page 189. To recycle the used  
cartridge, follow the instructions included with the new cartridge.  
HP fraud hotline and Web site  
Call the HP fraud hotline (1-877-219-3183, toll-free in North America) or go to www.hp.com/go/  
anticounterfeit when you install an HP print cartridge and the control-panel message says the cartridge  
is non-HP. HP will help determine if the cartridge is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem.  
Your print cartridge might not be a genuine HP print cartridge if you notice the following:  
You are experiencing a high number of problems with the print cartridge.  
The cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the orange pull tab is missing, or the  
packaging differs from HP packaging).  
ENWW  
Manage supplies 187  
             
Replace supplies  
When you use genuine HP supplies, the product automatically notifies you when supplies are nearly  
depleted. The notification to order supplies allows ample time to order new supplies before they need  
to be replaced. For more information about ordering supplies, see Supplies and accessories  
Locate supplies  
Supplies are identified by their labeling and their blue plastic handles.  
The following figure illustrates the location of each supply item.  
Figure 14-1 Supply item locations  
3
2
1
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Image drums  
Print cartridges  
Document feeder kit  
Fuser  
Transfer unit  
Transfer roller  
Supply replacement guidelines  
To facilitate the replacement of supplies, keep the following guidelines in mind when setting up the  
product.  
Allow sufficient space in the front and on the right side of the product for removing supplies.  
The product should be located on a flat, sturdy surface.  
CAUTION: Hewlett-Packard recommends the use of genuine HP products in this product. Use of non-  
HP products may cause problems requiring service that is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard extended  
warranty or service agreements.  
188 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
       
Approximate replacement intervals for supplies  
The following table lists the estimated replacement intervals for supplies and the control panel messages  
that prompt when to replace each item. Usage conditions and print patterns may cause results to vary.  
Item  
Printer message  
Page count  
Approximate time period  
4 months for color  
Print cartridges  
Replace <color> Cartridge  
17,000 pages1 for color  
20,000 pages for black  
35,000 pages1  
5 months for black  
Image drums  
Image transfer kit  
Image fuser kit  
Roller kit  
Replace <color> Drum  
Replace Transfer Kit  
Replace Fuser Kit  
150,000 pages2  
100,000 pages  
37 months  
25 months  
25 months  
Replace Roller Kit  
100,000 pages  
Stapler cartridge  
Replace Stapler Cartridge  
5000 staples  
Booklet maker staple  
cartridges  
Replace Staple Cartridges 2 2,000 booklets  
and 3  
Document feeder kit  
Replace Document Feeder  
Kit  
60,000 pages  
50 months  
1
2
Approximate average A4-/letter-size page count based on 2-page jobs printed from Tray 2, with 5% coverage of individual  
colors.  
Approximate life is based on 4,000 pages per month.  
Change print cartridges  
When a print cartridge approaches the end of its useful life, the control panel displays a message  
recommending that you order a replacement. The product can continue to print using the current print  
cartridge until the control panel displays a message instructing you to replace the cartridge.  
The product uses four colors and has a different print cartridge for each color: black (K), magenta (M),  
cyan (C), and yellow (Y).  
Replace a print cartridge when the control panel displays a Replace <color> Cartridge message. The  
control panel display will also indicate the color that should be replaced (if a genuine HP cartridge is  
currently installed). Replacement instructions are included in the print-cartridge box.  
CAUTION: If toner gets on clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot  
water sets toner into fabric.  
NOTE: Information about recycling used print cartridges is on the print-cartridge box.  
ENWW  
Replace supplies 189  
       
Replace print cartridges  
1. Grasp the grips on the sides of the front door and pull down to open.  
2. Grasp the handle of the used print cartridge and pull out to remove.  
3. Store the used print cartridge in a protective bag. Information about recycling used print cartridges  
is on the print-cartridge box.  
4. Remove additional print cartridges in the same manner.  
190 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
5. Remove the new print cartridge from its protective bag.  
NOTE: Store the protective bag in a secure place for future use.  
6. Hold both sides of the cartridge and shake up and down 5-6 times.  
7. Align the print cartridge with its slot and insert the print cartridge until it clicks into place.  
8. Insert additional print cartridges in the same manner.  
ENWW  
Replace supplies 191  
9. Grasp the grips on the sides of the front door and lift up to close.  
To recycle the used print cartridge, follow the instructions included with the new print cartridge.  
Change image drums  
When an image drum approaches the end of its useful life, the control panel displays a message  
recommending that you order a replacement. The product can continue to print using the current image  
drum until the control panel displays a message instructing you to replace the image drum.  
The product uses four colors and has a different image drums for each color: black (K), magenta (M),  
cyan (C), and yellow (Y).  
Replace an image drum when the control panel displays Replace <color> Drum message. The control-  
panel display also indicates the color that should be replaced (if a genuine HP cartridge is currently  
installed). Replacement instructions are included in the image drum box.  
CAUTION: If toner gets on clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot  
water sets toner into fabric.  
NOTE: Information about recycling used image drums is on the image drum box.  
192 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
   
Replace image drums  
1. Grasp the grips on the sides of the front door and pull down to open.  
2. With one hand, lift and slowly pull the used image drum out of the product, while supporting the  
image drum with your other hand.  
CAUTION: If reusing the same image drum, do not touch the green cylinder on the bottom of the  
drum because it can damage the drum.  
3. Store the used image drum in a protective bag. Information about recycling used image drums is  
on the image drum box.  
4. Remove additional image drums in the same manner.  
ENWW  
Replace supplies 193  
5. Remove the new image drum from its protective bag.  
NOTE: Store protective bag in a secure place for future use.  
NOTE: Do not shake the image drum.  
CAUTION: Do not touch the green cylinder on the bottom of the image drum because it can  
damage the drum.  
6. Align the image drum with the correct slot and insert the image drum until it clicks into place. The  
gray protective cover on the bottom of the drum automatically slides off as the image drum is  
inserted. You can discard this cover.  
7. Insert additional image drums in the same manner.  
8. Grasp the grips on the sides of the front door and lift up to close.  
194 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
To recycle the used image drum, follow the instructions included with the new image drum.  
Install memory  
You can install more memory for the product.  
CAUTION: Static electricity can damage DIMMs. When handling DIMMs, either wear an antistatic  
wrist strap, or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare metal  
on the product.  
Install DDR memory DIMMs  
1. Turn the product off.  
2. Disconnect all power and interface cables.  
ENWW  
Replace supplies 195  
     
3. Locate the black formatter pressure release tabs on the formatter board in the rear of the product.  
4. Gently press the black tabs toward each other.  
5. Gently pull on the black tabs to pull the formatter board from the product. Place the formatter board  
on a clean, flat, grounded surface.  
196 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
6. To replace a DIMM that is currently installed, spread the latches apart on each side of the DIMM  
slot, lift the DIMM up at an angle, and pull it out.  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXOXOXOXO  
XOXOXOXOXOXO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XOXOXO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XOXOXO  
XO  
XOXO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXO  
7. Remove the new DIMM from the antistatic package. Locate the alignment notch on the bottom  
edge of the DIMM.  
8. Holding the DIMM by the edges, align the notch on the DIMM with the bar in the DIMM slot at an  
angle and firmly press the DIMM into the slot until it is fully seated. When installed correctly, the  
metal contacts are not visible.  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
X O  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXOXOXOXO  
XOXOXOXOXOXO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XOXOXO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XOXOXO  
XO  
XOXO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXO  
9. Push down on the DIMM until both latches engage the DIMM.  
XI
X
I
IXO  
XIO  
XIO  
OX  
XIO  
I
X
O
XIO  
XIXO  
XIO  
XIO  
OX  
I
XIO  
XIO  
XIXO  
X
O
XIO  
X
XO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
OX  
XIXO  
I
X
O
OX  
I
X
O
XO  
XO  
XO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXOXOXOXO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXOXOXOXO  
XOXO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XOXOXO  
XO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXO  
XO  
XO  
XO  
XOXOXO  
XOXOXO  
NOTE: If you have difficulty inserting the DIMM, make sure the notch on the bottom of the DIMM  
is aligned with the bar in the slot. If the DIMM still does not go in, make sure you are using the  
correct type of DIMM.  
ENWW  
Replace supplies 197  
10. Align the formatter board in the tracks at the bottom of the slot, and then slide the board back into  
the product.  
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the formatter board, ensure the formatter board is aligned in  
the tracks.  
11. Reconnect the power cable and interface cables, and turn the product on.  
12. To enable the new memory, go to Enable memory on page 198.  
Enable memory  
If you installed a memory DIMM, set the product driver to recognize the newly added memory.  
Enable memory for Windows 2000 and XP  
1. On the Start menu, point to Settings, and click Printers or Printers and Faxes.  
2. Right-click the product and select Properties.  
3. On the Device Settings tab, click Printer Memory (in the Installable Options section).  
4. Select the total amount of memory that is now installed.  
5. Click OK.  
198 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
     
Install an HP Jetdirect or EIO print server card or EIO hard disk  
The HP Color LaserJet CM6049f MFP is equipped with an embedded print server port. If desired, you  
can install an additional I/O card in the available EIO slot.  
1. Turn the product off.  
2. Disconnect all power and interface cables.  
ENWW  
Replace supplies 199  
 
3. Locate an open EIO slot. Loosen and remove the two retaining screws holding the cover for the  
EIO slot, and then remove the cover. You will not need these screws and the cover again. They  
can be discarded.  
4. Firmly insert the HP Jetdirect print server card into the EIO slot.  
5. Insert and tighten the retaining screws that came with the print server card.  
200 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
6. Reconnect the power cable and remaining interface cables, and turn the product on.  
7. Print a configuration page. In addition to a product configuration page and a Supplies Status page,  
an HP Jetdirect configuration page that contains network configuration and status information  
should also print.  
If it does not print, turn the power to the device off and uninstall and reinstall the print server card  
to ensure that it is completely seated in the slot.  
8. Perform one of these steps:  
Choose the correct port. See the computer or operating system documentation for  
instructions.  
Reinstall the software, choosing the network installation this time.  
Replace the staple cartridge  
If the optional HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker Accessory or HP Booklet Maker/Finisher Accessory runs out of  
staples while it is stapling a print job, the product automatically stops, if set to stop when out. If the  
product is set to continue when out, the product will continue to print without stapling.  
NOTE: Only replace the staple cartridge unit when the stapler/stacker or booklet maker has run out  
of staples. Removing the staple cartridge at other times can cause an error to occur.  
NOTE: When the stapler/stacker or booklet maker runs out of staples, the stapler unit will return to its  
default position automatically.  
Replace the staple cartridge  
1. Open the front door of the booklet maker or stapler/stacker.  
ENWW  
Replace supplies 201  
   
2. Push up to on the staple cartridge to remove it from the booklet maker or stapler/stacker.  
3. Insert the replacement staple cartridge unit into the stapler unit.  
4. Push the staple cartridge unit into the stapler unit until it clicks into position.  
5. Close the front door.  
202 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
Replace saddle stitch staple cartridges in the booklet maker  
1. Open the front door of the booklet maker.  
2. Grasp the blue handle and pull the staple carriage out of the booklet maker.  
3. Grasp the small blue handle on the staple cartridge unit and pull it toward you, then swing the staple  
cartridge unit into an upright position.  
2
1
4. Grasp the edges of each staple cartridge and pull up firmly to remove the staple cartridges from  
the staple cartridge unit.  
ENWW  
Replace supplies 203  
 
5. Unpack the new cartridges and remove the plastic packing lock from each one.  
6. Hold the new cartridges so that the arrows on the cartridges align with the arrows on the staple  
cartridge unit and insert them into the unit.  
7. Pull the handle of the staple cartridge unit toward you and rotate it downward to its original position.  
Lock it into position by pushing in the handle.  
1
2
8. Push the staple carriage back into the booklet maker finisher.  
204 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
9. Close the front door of the booklet maker.  
ENWW  
Replace supplies 205  
Clean the product  
To maintain print quality, clean the product thoroughly every time you replace the print cartridge and  
whenever print-quality problems occur.  
WARNING! Avoid touching the fusing area when cleaning the product. It can be hot.  
CAUTION: To avoid permanent damage to the print cartridge, do not use ammonia-based cleaners  
on or around the product except as directed.  
Clean the outside of the product  
Clean the outside of the product if it is visibly marked.  
Use a soft, lint-free cloth dampened with water, or water and a mild detergent.  
Clean the touchscreen  
Clean the touchscreen whenever it is necessary to remove fingerprints or dust. Wipe the touchscreen  
gently with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.  
CAUTION: Use water only. Solvents or cleaners can damage the touchscreen. Do not pour or spray  
water directly onto the touchscreen.  
Clean the scanner glass  
Clean the scanner glass only if dirt is visible, or if you are experiencing a decrease in copy quality,  
such as streaking.  
Clean the scanner glass by wiping it gently with a clean, slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Use an  
ammonia-based surface cleaner only when a water-dampened cloth does not clean the scanner  
glass.  
CAUTION: Do not pour or spray liquids directly onto the scanner glass. Do not press hard on the glass  
surface. (You could break the glass).  
Cleaning the ADF delivery system  
Clean the ADF only if it is visibly marked or dirty, or if you are experiencing a decrease in copy quality  
(such as streaking).  
206 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
                   
Clean the ADF delivery system  
1. Open the scanner lid.  
2. Locate the white, vinyl ADF backing.  
3. Clean the ADF backing by wiping them with a clean, damp, lint-free cloth. Use an ammonia-based  
surface cleaner only when a water-dampened cloth does not clean the ADF components.  
4. Clean the scanner glass by wiping it gently with a clean, slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Use an  
ammonia-based surface cleaner only when a water-dampened cloth does not clean the scanner  
glass.  
5. Close the scanner lid.  
ENWW  
Clean the product 207  
 
Clean the ADF rollers  
You should clean the rollers in the ADF if you are experiencing misfeeds or if your originals show marks  
as they exit the ADF.  
CAUTION: Clean the rollers only if you experience misfeeds or marks on the originals, and you notice  
dust on the rollers. Cleaning the rollers frequently could introduce dust into the device.  
1. Pull the release lever to open the ADF cover.  
2. Locate the rollers.  
3. Wipe the rollers with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.  
CAUTION: Do not pour water directly onto the rollers. Doing so might damage the device.  
4. Locate the separation pad.  
5. Wipe the pad with a clean, water-dampened, lint-free cloth.  
208 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
   
6. Close the ADF cover.  
ENWW  
Clean the product 209  
ADF maintenance kit  
After feeding 60,000 pages through the ADF, a Replace Document Feeder Kit message appears on  
the control-panel display. This message appears approximately one month before the kit needs to be  
replaced. Order a new kit when this message appears. See Part numbers on page 275 for information  
about ordering a new ADF maintenance kit.  
The ADF maintenance kit includes the following items:  
One pick-up roller assembly  
One separation pad  
An instruction sheet  
Follow the instructions that come with the kit to install it.  
After replacing the kit, reset the ADF maintenance-kit count.  
Reset the ADF maintenance-kit count  
1. On the control panel, scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Touch Resets.  
3. Touch Reset Supplies.  
4. Touch ADF Maintenance Kit.  
5. Touch Yes.  
6. Touch Save.  
210 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
 
Calibrate the scanner  
Calibrate the scanner to compensate for offsets in the scanner imaging system (carriage head) for ADF  
and flatbed scans. Because of mechanical tolerances, the scanner's carriage head might not read the  
position of the image accurately. During the calibration procedure, scanner offset values are calculated  
and stored. The offset values are then used when producing scans so that the correct portion of the  
document is captured.  
Scanner calibration should be carried out only if you notice offset problems with the scanned images.  
The scanner is calibrated before it leaves the factory. It needs to be calibrated again only rarely.  
Before calibrating the scanner, print the calibration target.  
1. Place letter- or A4-size paper in tray 1, and adjust the side guides.  
2. On the control-panel Home screen, scroll to and touch Administration.  
3. Touch Troubleshooting.  
4. Touch Calibrate Scanner.  
5. Touch Calibrate to print the first pass of the calibration target.  
6. Place the first pass of the calibration target face-down in tray 1 so that the arrows are facing into  
the product.  
7. Touch Start to print the second pass. The final calibration target must look like the following figure.  
CAUTION: If the calibration target does not look like the figure shown here, the calibration  
process will fail and the quality of scans will be degraded. The black areas must extend completely  
to the short edges of the page. If they do not, use a black marker to extend the black areas to the  
edge of the page. Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.  
8. Place the calibration target face-up into the ADF, and adjust the side guides.  
9. After the calibration target has passed through the ADF once, reposition it face down in the ADF  
and touch Start.  
10. Place the calibration target face-down on the scanner glass, touch Start, and scan the page. After  
this pass, the calibration is complete.  
ENWW  
Calibrate the scanner 211  
   
Upgrade the firmware  
The product has remote firmware update (RFU) capability. Use the information in this section to upgrade  
the product firmware.  
Determine the current firmware version  
1. From the control panel Home screen, scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Touch Information.  
3. Touch Configuration/status Pages.  
4. Touch Configuration Page.  
5. Touch Print.  
The firmware datecode is listed on the Configuration page in the section called Device Information.  
The firmware datecode has this format: YYYYMMDD XX.XXX.X. The first string of numbers is the date,  
where YYYY represents the year, MM represents the month, and DD represents the date. For example,  
a firmware datecode of that begins with 20061125represents November 25, 2006.  
Download new firmware from the HP Web site  
To find the most recent firmware upgrade for the product, go to www.hp.com/go/  
cljcm6049mfp_firmware. This page provides instructions for downloading the new firmware version.  
Transfer the new firmware to the product  
NOTE: The product can receive an .RFU file update when it is in a "ready" state.  
The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for the  
product to re-initialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed of the  
host computer that is sending the update. If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before  
the firmware is downloaded (while Receiving Upgrade appears on the control-panel display), the  
firmware file must be sent again. If power is lost during the flash DIMM update (while the Performing  
Upgrade message appears on the control-panel display), the update is interrupted and the message  
Resend Upgrade appears (in English only) on the control-panel display. In this case, you must send  
the upgrade by using the parallel port. Finally, any jobs that are ahead of the RFU job in the queue are  
completed before the update is processed.  
Use FTP to upload the firmware through a browser  
NOTE: The firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access memory  
(NVRAM). Any menu settings that are changed from the default settings might return to default settings  
and must be changed again if you want settings that are different from the defaults.  
1. Print a configuration page and note the TCP/IP address shown on the EIO Jetdirect page.  
2. Open a browser window.  
3. In the address line of the browser, type ftp://<ADDRESS>, where <ADDRESS> is the address  
of the product. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type ftp://  
192.168.0.90.  
212 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
           
4. Locate the downloaded .RFU file for the product.  
5. Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.  
NOTE: The product turns off and then on automatically to activate the update. When the update  
process is complete, a Ready message displays on the product control panel.  
Use FTP to upgrade the firmware on a network connection  
NOTE: The firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access memory  
(NVRAM). Any menu settings that are changed from the default settings might return to default settings  
and must be changed again if you want settings that are different from the defaults.  
1. Take note of the IP address on the HP Jetdirect page. The HP Jetdirect page is the second page  
that prints when you print the configuration page.  
NOTE: Before upgrading the firmware, make sure that the product is not in Sleep mode. Also  
make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control-panel display.  
2. Open an MS-DOS command prompt on your computer.  
3. Type: ftp TCP/IP ADDRESS>. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type ftp  
192.168.0.90.  
4. Go to the folder where the firmware file is stored.  
5. Press Enter on the keyboard.  
6. When prompted for the user name, press Enter.  
7. When prompted for the password, press Enter.  
8. Type binat the command prompt.  
9. Press Enter. The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in  
the command window.  
10. Type putand then the file name (for example, if the file name is CM6049fmfp.efn, type put  
CM6049fmfp.efn).  
11. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the product. This can take  
approximately five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the product or  
computer.  
NOTE: The product automatically turns off and then on again after processing the upgrade.  
12. At the command prompt, type: byeto exit the ftp command.  
13. At the command prompt, type: exitto return to the Windows interface.  
ENWW  
Upgrade the firmware 213  
 
Use HP Web Jetadmin to upgrade the firmware  
This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin Version 7.0 or later on your computer. See  
Use HP Web Jetadmin software on page 182. Complete the following steps to update a single device  
through HP Web Jetadmin after downloading the .RFU file from the HP Web site.  
1. Start HP Web Jetadmin.  
2. Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to  
the Device Lists folder.  
3. Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices. Locate the product in the list of devices,  
and then click to select it.  
If you need to upgrade the firmware for multiple HP Color LaserJet CM6049f MFP products, select  
all of them by pressing the Ctrl key as you click the name of each product.  
4. Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper-right corner of the window. Select Update  
Printer Firmware from the action list.  
5. If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images box, click Browse in the  
Upload New Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU file that you  
downloaded from the Web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it.  
6. Click Upload to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web Jetadmin server. After the  
upload is complete, the browser window refreshes.  
7. Select the .RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu.  
8. Click Update Firmware. HP Web Jetadmin sends the selected .RFU file to the product. The control  
panel shows messages that indicate the progress of the upgrade. At the end of the upgrade  
process, the control panel shows the Ready message.  
Use MS-DOS commands to upgrade the firmware  
To update the firmware by using a network connection, follow these instructions.  
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following: copy /B FILENAME> \  
\COMPUTERNAME>\SHARENAME>, where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the  
path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the product is being shared,  
and <SHARENAME> is the product share name. For example: C:\>copy /b C:\9200fW.RFU  
\\YOUR_SERVER\YOUR_COMPUTER.  
NOTE: If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in  
quotation marks. For example, type: C:\>copy /b "C:\MY DOCUMENTS\3500FW.RFU" \  
\YOUR_SERVER\YOUR_COMPUTER.  
2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The control panel shows a message that indicates the progress of  
the firmware upgrade. At the end of the upgrade process, the control panel shows the Ready  
message . The message One File Copied appears on the computer screen.  
Use the HP Jetdirect firmware  
The HP Jetdirect network interface in the product has firmware that can be upgraded separately from  
the product firmware. This procedure requires that you install HP Web Jetadmin Version 7.0 or later on  
214 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
       
your computer. See Use HP Web Jetadmin software on page 182. Complete the following steps to  
update the HP Jetdirect firmware by using HP Web Jetadmin.  
1. Open the HP Web Jetadmin program.  
2. Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to  
the Device Lists folder.  
3. Select the device that you want to update.  
4. In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Jetdirect Firmware Update.  
5. Under Jetdirect firmware version the HP Jetdirect model number and current firmware version  
are listed. Make a note of these.  
7. Scroll down to the list of HP Jetdirect model numbers and find the model number you wrote down.  
8. Look at the current firmware version for the model, and see if it is later than the version you wrote  
down. If it is, right-click on the firmware link, and follow the instructions on the Web page to  
download the new firmware file. The file must be saved into the <drive>:\PROGRAM FILES  
\HP WEB JETADMIN\DOC\PLUGINS\HPWJA\FIRMWARE\JETDIRECT folder on the computer  
that is running the HP Web Jetadmin software.  
9. In HP Web Jetadmin, return to the main device list and select the digital sender again.  
10. In the Device Tools drop-down list, select Jetdirect Firmware Update again.  
11. On the HP Jetdirect firmware page, the new firmware version is listed under Jetdirect Firmware  
Available on HP Web Jetadmin. Click the Update Firmware Now button to update the Jetdirect  
firmware.  
ENWW  
Upgrade the firmware 215  
 
216 Chapter 14 Manage and maintain the product  
ENWW  
Solving general problems  
If the product is not responding properly, complete the steps in the following checklist, in order. If the  
product does not pass a step, follow the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions. If a step resolves  
the problem, you can stop without performing the other steps on the checklist.  
Troubleshooting checklist  
1. Make sure the product Ready light is on. If no lights are on, complete these steps:  
a. Check the power-cable connections.  
b. Check that the power switch is on.  
c. Make sure that the line voltage is correct for the product power configuration. (See the label  
that is on the back of the product for voltage requirements.) If you are using a power strip and  
its voltage is not within specifications, plug the product directly into the wall. If it is already  
plugged into the wall, try a different outlet.  
d. Remove any other products plugged into the same circuit.  
e. If none of these measures restores power, contact your dealer for support.  
2. Check the cabling.  
a. Check the cable connection between the product and the computer or network port. Make  
sure that the connection is secure.  
b. Make sure that the cable itself is not faulty by using a different cable, if possible.  
c. Check the network connection. See Solve network printing problems on page 268.  
3. If the product is in the READY state, check to see if any message appear on the control-panel  
display. If any error messages appear, see Control-panel messages on page 221.  
4. Ensure that the print paper that you are using meets specifications.  
5. Print a configuration page (see Information pages on page 176. An HP Jetdirect page also prints.)  
a. If the pages do not print, check that at least one tray contains print paper.  
b. If the page jams in the product, see Jams on page 222.  
6. If the configuration page prints, check the following items.  
a. If the page prints correctly, then the product hardware is working. The problem is with the  
computer you are using, with the printer driver, or with the program.  
b. If the page does not print correctly, the problem is with the product hardware. Contact your  
dealer for support.  
7. Select one of the following options:  
Windows: Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers, or Printers and Faxes. Double click  
HP Color LaserJet CM6049f.  
-or-  
218 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
     
Mac OS X: Open Print Center, (or Printer Setup Utility for Mac OS X v. 10.3), and double-click  
the line for the HP Color LaserJet CM6049f.  
8. Verify that you have installed the HP Color LaserJet CM6049f printer driver. Check the program to  
make sure that you are using an HP Color LaserJet CM6049f printer driver.  
9. Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution works,  
then the problem is with the program you are using. If this solution does not work (the document  
does not print) complete these steps:  
a. Try printing the job from another computer that has the product software installed.  
b. If you connected the product to the network, connect the product directly to a computer with  
a USB cable. Redirect the product to the correct port, or reinstall the software, selecting the  
new connection type that you are using.  
Restore factory settings  
Use the Resets menu to restore factory settings.  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration and then touch Resets.  
2. Touch Restore Factory Settings and then touch Restore.  
For more information, see Resets menu on page 58.  
Factors that affect product performance  
Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job:  
Maximum printer speed, measured in pages per minute (ppm)  
The use of special paper (such as transparencies, heavy paper, and custom-size paper)  
Printer processing and download time  
The complexity and size of graphics  
The speed of the computer you are using  
The USB connection  
The printer I/O configuration  
The amount of printer memory installed  
The network operating system and configuration (if applicable)  
Printer personality (HP JetReady, PCL, or PS)  
NOTE: Although additional printer memory can resolve memory problems, improve how the printer  
handles complex graphics, and improve download times, it will not increase maximum printer speed  
(ppm).  
ENWW  
Solving general problems 219  
     
Control-panel message types  
Four types of control-panel messages can indicate the status of or problems with the device.  
Message type  
Description  
Status messages  
Status messages reflect the current state of the device. They inform you of normal device operation  
and require no interaction to clear them. They change as the state of the device changes. Whenever  
the device is ready, not busy, and has no pending warning messages, the status message Ready  
appears if the device is online.  
Warning messages  
Error messages  
Warning messages inform you of data and print errors. These messages typically alternate with the  
Ready or status messages and remain until you touch OK. Some warning messages are clearable.  
If Clearable Warnings is set to Job on the device Device Behavior menu, the next print job clears  
these messages.  
Error messages communicate that some action must be performed, such as adding paper or clearing  
a jam.  
Some error messages are auto-continuable. If Auto-Continue is set on the menus, the device will  
continue normal operation after an auto-continuable error message appears for 10 seconds.  
NOTE: Pressing any button during the 10-second auto-continuable error message overrides the  
auto-continue feature, and the button function takes precedence. For example, pressing the Stop  
button pauses printing and offers the option to cancel the print job.  
Critical-error messages Critical error messages inform you of a device failure. Some of these messages can be cleared by  
turning the device off and then on. These messages are not affected by the Auto-Continue setting.  
If a critical error persists, service is required.  
220 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
 
Control-panel messages  
The product provides robust control panel messaging. When a message appears on the control panel,  
follow the on-screen instructions to resolve the issue. If the product displays an “Error” or “Attention”  
message, and no steps are shown to resolve the issue, turn the product off then on. Contact your dealer  
for support if you continue to experience issues with the product.  
To get additional information for warnings that appear in the status line, touch the Warning button  
.
For additional information on a variety of topics, touch the Help button  
the home screen.  
in the upper-right corner of  
ENWW  
Control-panel messages 221  
 
Jams  
Common causes of jams  
The product is jammed.  
Cause  
Solution  
The paper does not meet specifications.  
Use only paper that meets HP specifications. See Supported  
A component is installed incorrectly.  
Verify that the transfer belt and transfer roller are correctly  
installed.  
You are using paper that has already passed through a product Do not use paper that has been previously printed on or copied.  
or copier.  
An input tray is loaded incorrectly.  
Remove any excess paper from the input tray. Make sure that  
the stack is below the maximum stack height mark in the tray.  
The paper is skewed.  
The input-tray guides are not adjusted correctly. Adjust them  
so they hold the stack firmly in place without bending it.  
The paper is binding or sticking together.  
Remove the paper, flex it, rotate it 180°, or flip it over. Reload  
the paper into the input tray.  
When printing on lightweight paper or on jobs with heavy toner Set the LIGHT MEDIA optimize mode on the Print Quality  
coverage, paper is wrapping on the fuser causing Fuser Delay menu to ON.  
Jam or Fuser Wrap Jam messages.  
The paper is removed before it settles into the output bin.  
Reset the product. Wait until the page completely settles in the  
output bin before removing it.  
During two-sided printing, you removed the paper before the Reset the product and print the document again. Wait until the  
second side of the document was printed.  
page completely settles in the output bin before removing it.  
The paper is in poor condition.  
Replace the paper.  
If the paper is heavier than 220 g/m2 (58 lb), it might not be  
picked from the tray.  
The internal tray rollers are not picking up the paper.  
The rollers are worn. Replace the rollers.  
Replace the paper.  
The paper has rough or jagged edges.  
The paper is perforated or embossed.  
Perforated or embossed paper does not separate easily. Feed  
single sheets from Tray 1.  
Device supply items have reached the end of their useful life. Check the product control panel for messages prompting you  
to replace supplies, or print a supplies status page to verify the  
remaining life of the supplies. See Information pages  
Paper was not stored correctly.  
Replace the paper in the trays. Paper should be stored in the  
original packaging in a controlled environment.  
Not all product packing material was removed.  
Verify that the packing tape, cardboard, and plastic shipping  
locks have been removed from the product.  
If the product still continues to jam, contact your dealer for support.  
222 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
     
Jam locations  
Use this illustration to identify locations of jams. In addition, this product provides instructions on the  
control panel to direct you to the location of jammed paper and how to clear it.  
NOTE: All areas of the product that might need to be opened to clear jams are equipped with green  
handles.  
Figure 15-1 Jam locations  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
AREA 1: Output bin  
AREA 2: Fuser area  
AREA 3: Transfer area  
AREA 4: Duplexing area  
AREA 5: Tray 2 pickup area  
AREA 6: Tray 1 area  
AREA 7: Optional Trays 3, 4, and 5  
AREA 8: Optional finishing device  
AREA 9: ADF area  
Clear jams  
When a jam occurs, a message appears on the control-panel display that describes the location of the  
jam. The following table lists the messages that can appear and provides links to the procedures for  
clearing the jam.  
ENWW  
Jams 223  
   
WARNING! To avoid electrical shock, remove any necklaces, bracelets, or other metal items before  
reaching into the inside of the product.  
Type of jam  
Procedure  
13.JJ.NT Jam below control panel  
13.JJ.NT Fuser Area Jam  
13.JJ.NT Fuser Wrap Jam  
13.JJ.NT Transfer And Fuser Jam  
13.JJ.NT Jam Inside Right Door  
13.JJ.NT Jam In Tray 2  
13.JJ.NT Transfer Area Jam  
13.JJ.NT Jam In Tray 1  
13.JJ.NT Jam In Tray 3  
13.JJ.NT Jam In Tray 4  
13.JJ.NT Jam In Tray 5  
13.JJ.NT Jam Inside Lower Right Door  
13.JJ.NT Jam In Input Accessory  
13.JJ.NT Jam In Left Accessory  
Jam in document feeder  
AREA 1: Clear jams in the output bin  
1. If jammed paper is visible in the output bin, gently pull the paper to remove it.  
224 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
 
2. Open the right door.  
3. If paper has jammed as it enters the output bin, gently pull the paper to remove it.  
4. Close the right door.  
ENWW  
Jams 225  
AREA 2: Clear jams in the fuser  
WARNING! The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling  
it.  
1. Open the right door.  
2. Lift the green handle on the transfer-access panel and open the panel.  
1
2
3. If paper is visible entering the bottom of the fuser, gently pull downward to remove it.  
226 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
 
4. Close the transfer-access panel.  
5. Open the fuser jam access door above the fuser and remove any paper that is visible. Then close  
the fuser jam access door.  
6. Paper could also be jammed inside the fuser where it would not be visible. Remove the fuser to  
check for jammed paper inside.  
WARNING! The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before  
handling it.  
a. Pull the two blue fuser handles forward.  
ENWW  
Jams 227  
b. Rotate the fuser-release levers down to open them.  
c. Grasp the fuser handles and pull straight out to remove the fuser.  
CAUTION: The fuser weighs 5 kg (11 lbs). Be careful not to drop it.  
d. Open the two fuser jam access doors by pushing and rotating the rear door backward, and  
pulling and rotating the front door forward. If paper is jammed inside the fuser, gently pull it  
straight up to remove it. If the paper tears, remove all paper fragments.  
WARNING! Even if the body of the fuser has cooled, the rollers that are inside could still be  
hot. Do not touch the fuser rollers until they have cooled.  
2
1
228 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
e. Close both fuser jam-access doors and align the fuser with the arrows on the product. Push  
the fuser completely into the printer.  
f.  
Rotate the fuser-release levers up to lock the fuser into place.  
g. Push the fuser handles back to close them.  
ENWW  
Jams 229  
7. Close the right door.  
Clear jams in the duplex area  
1. Check for jammed paper inside the product. Open the right door.  
230 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
 
2. If paper is jammed below the duplexing unit, gently pull the paper downward to remove it.  
3. If paper is jammed inside the right door, gently pull the paper to remove it.  
ENWW  
Jams 231  
4. Lift the paper-feed cover on the inside of the right door. If jammed paper is present, gently pull the  
paper straight out to remove it.  
1
2
5. Lift the green handle on the transfer-assembly and open the panel.  
1
2
6. Gently pull the paper out of the paper path.  
232 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
7. Close the transfer-access panel.  
8. Close the right door.  
AREA 5: Clear jams in Tray 2 and the internal paper path  
1. Open the right door.  
ENWW  
Jams 233  
 
2. Lift the green handle on the transfer-access panel and open the panel.  
1
2
3. Gently pull the paper out of the paper path.  
4. Close the transfer-access panel.  
234 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
5. Open Tray 2 and make sure that the paper is stacked correctly.  
6. Pull the tray completely out of the product by pulling and lifting it up slightly.  
7. Remove any paper from the feeder rollers inside the product.  
8. Reinsert Tray 2 by aligning the side rollers and pushing it back into the product.  
ENWW  
Jams 235  
9. Close the tray.  
10. Close the right door.  
AREA 6: Clear jams in Tray 1  
NOTE: Even if jammed paper is visible in Tray 1, clear the jam from the inside of the product by opening  
the right door.  
236 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
 
1. Open the right door.  
NOTE: When clearing jams of long paper (11 x 17, 12 x 18, and A3), it may be necessary to cut  
or tear the jammed paper before opening the right door.  
2. If paper is visible inside the right door, gently pull the paper downward to remove it.  
ENWW  
Jams 237  
3. If paper has entered the internal paper path, lift the green handle on the transfer-access panel and  
open the panel.  
1
2
4. Gently pull the paper out of the paper path.  
5. Close the transfer-access panel.  
238 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
6. Close the right door.  
AREA 7: Clear jams in optional Trays 3, 4, and 5  
1. Open the right door.  
2. If paper is visible in the paper-input area, gently pull the jammed paper up to remove it.  
ENWW  
Jams 239  
 
3. Close the right door.  
4. Open the lower right door.  
5. Gently pull the jammed paper to remove it.  
240 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
6. Open the tray that is indicated in the control-panel message, and make sure that the paper is  
stacked correctly.  
7. Close the tray.  
8. Close the lower right door.  
ENWW  
Jams 241  
AREA 8: Clear jams in the optional finishing devices  
Clear jams in the output-accessory bridge  
1. Lift the latch on the top cover of the output-accessory bridge and open the top cover.  
2. Gently pull the jammed paper to remove it.  
3. Close the top cover of the output-accessory bridge.  
242 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
   
Clear jams in the sorter area  
1. Lift the latch on the top cover of the finishing device, and open the top cover.  
NOTE: Opening the top cover releases pressure on the output-bin rollers.  
2. Remove jammed paper from the output bin or from the inside of the finishing device.  
2
3
1
3. Close the top cover of the finishing device.  
ENWW  
Jams 243  
 
4. Lift the swing guide panel in the output bin. If you can see any jammed paper, gently pull it out.  
Clear jams in the booklet maker  
1. If the paper is visible in the booklet output bin, gently pull the paper to remove it.  
2. Open the front door of the booklet maker.  
3. Push the upper delivery guide to the right, and remove any jammed paper.  
1
2
244 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
 
4. Push the lower delivery guide to the right, and remove any jammed paper.  
2
1
5. The positioning knob is the smaller, green dial on the right. Turn the positioning knob  
counterclockwise.  
6. The jam-release knob is the larger, green dial on the left. Push in the jam-release knob, and then  
turn it clockwise to move any jammed paper into the output bin.  
7. Close the front door of the booklet maker.  
ENWW  
Jams 245  
AREA 9: Clear jams in the ADF  
1. Open the ADF cover.  
2. Remove any jammed media.  
3. Close the ADF cover.  
246 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
 
Clear staple jams  
Clear staple jams in the main stapler  
The HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker and the HP Booklet maker/Finisher Accessory each have a main stapler,  
which is located near the top of the finishing device.  
1. Open the front door of the finishing device.  
2. To remove the staple cartridge, pull up on the green handle and pull out the staple cartridge.  
3. Lift up on the small lever at the back of the staple cartridge.  
4. Remove the damaged staples that protrude from the staple cartridge. Remove the entire sheet of  
staples that the damaged staples were attached to.  
ENWW  
Jams 247  
     
5. Close the lever at the back of the staple cartridge. Be sure that it snaps into place.  
6. Reinsert the staple cartridge into the finishing device, and push down on the green handle until it  
snaps into place.  
7. Close the front cover of the finishing device.  
Clear staple jams in the booklet maker  
The booklet maker has an additional saddle stitch stapler that is below the main stapler. The saddle  
stitch stapler has two staple cartridges.  
1. Open the front door of the booklet maker.  
248 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
 
2. Push the upper delivery guide to the right, and remove any jammed paper.  
1
2
3. Grasp the blue handle for the stapler carriage and pull it straight out.  
4. Grasp the handle of the blue staple cartridge unit and pull it toward you, then swing the staple  
cartridge unit into an upright position.  
2
1
ENWW  
Jams 249  
5. Check each staple cartridge for jammed staples.  
a. On each staple cartridge, press down on the green plastic tabs while lifting the jam clearance  
plate.  
WARNING! Do not place your fingers or hands underneath the staple cartridge during this  
procedure.  
1
2
3
b. Remove any jammed staples. Remove any damaged staples and the entire sheet of staples  
that the damaged staples were attached to.  
c. Press down on the jam clearance plate to close it.  
WARNING! Do not place your fingers or hands underneath the staple cartridge during this  
procedure.  
6. Pull the staple cartridge unit forward, and swing it downward to the original position. Push in on the  
handle to lock it into position.  
1
2
250 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
7. Push the staple carriage back into the booklet maker.  
8. Close the front door of the booklet maker.  
Jam recovery  
This product provides jam recovery, a feature that reprints jammed pages. The following options are  
available:  
Auto — The product attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available.  
Off — The product does not attempt to reprint jammed pages. Because no memory is used to store  
the most recent pages, performance is optimal.  
NOTE: When using this option, if the product runs out of paper and the job is being printed on  
both sides, some pages can be lost.  
On — The product always reprints jammed pages. Additional memory is allocated to store the last  
few pages printed. This might cause overall performance to suffer.  
Set the jam recovery feature  
1. Touch Administration and then touch Device Behavior.  
2. Touch Warning/Error Behavior and then touch Jam Recovery.  
3. Touch an option and then touch Save.  
ENWW  
Jams 251  
   
Paper-handling problems  
Use only paper that meets the specifications outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media  
Guide. This guide is available at www.hp.com/support/ljpaperguide.  
Product feeds multiple sheets  
Product feeds multiple sheets  
Cause  
Solution  
The input tray is overfilled. Open the tray and verify that the  
paper stack is below the maximum stack height mark.  
Remove excess paper from the input tray.  
Print paper is sticking together.  
Remove paper, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or flip it over, and  
then reload it into the tray.  
NOTE: Do not fan paper. Fanning can cause static electricity,  
which can cause paper to stick together.  
Paper does not meet the specifications for this product.  
Trays are not properly adjusted.  
Use only paper that meets HP paper specifications for this  
product.  
Make sure that the paper guides match the size of paper being  
used.  
Product feeds incorrect page size  
Product feeds incorrect page size  
Cause  
Solution  
The correct size paper is not loaded in the input tray.  
Load the correct size paper in the input tray.  
The correct size paper is not selected in the software program Confirm that the settings in the software program and printer  
or printer driver.  
driver are appropriate, since the software program settings  
override the printer driver and control panel settings, and the  
printer driver settings override the control panel settings. For  
The correct size paper for the tray is not selected in the product From the control panel, select the correct size paper for the  
control panel.  
tray.  
The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray.  
Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine  
the paper size for which the tray is configured.  
The guides in the tray are not against the paper.  
Verify that the paper guides are touching the paper.  
Product pulls from incorrect tray  
Product pulls from incorrect tray  
Cause  
Solution  
You are using a driver for a different product.  
The specified tray is empty.  
Use a driver for this product.  
Load paper in the specified tray.  
252 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
       
Product pulls from incorrect tray  
Cause  
Solution  
The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray.  
Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine  
the paper size for which the tray is configured.  
The guides in the tray are not against the paper.  
Verify that the guides are touching the paper.  
Paper does not feed automatically  
Paper does not feed automatically  
Cause  
Solution  
Manual feed is selected in the software program.  
Load Tray 1 with paper, or, if the paper is loaded, press the  
Start button.  
The correct size paper is not loaded.  
The input tray is empty.  
Load the correct size paper.  
Load paper into the input tray.  
Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the product and remove any paper in the paper path.  
The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray.  
Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine  
the paper size for which the tray is configured.  
The guides in the tray are not against the paper.  
Verify that the rear and width paper guides are touching the  
paper.  
The manual-feed prompt is set to ALWAYS. The product  
Open the tray, reload the media, and then close the tray.  
always prompts for manual feed, even if the tray is loaded.  
Or, change the manual-feed prompt setting to UNLESS  
LOADED, so that the product prompts for manual feed only  
when the tray is empty.  
The USE REQUESTED TRAY setting on the product is set to Load the requested tray.  
EXCLUSIVELY, and the requested tray is empty. The product  
Or, change the setting from EXCLUSIVELY to FIRST on the  
will not use another tray.  
CONFIGURE DEVICE menu. The product can use other trays  
if no media is loaded in the specified tray.  
Paper does not feed from Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5  
Paper does not feed from Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5  
Cause  
Solution  
The correct size paper is not loaded.  
The input tray is empty.  
Load the correct size paper.  
Load paper in the input tray.  
The correct paper type for the input tray is not selected in the From the product control panel, select the correct paper type  
product control panel. for the input tray.  
Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed. Open the product and remove any paper in the paper path.  
Closely inspect the fuser area for jams.  
ENWW  
Paper-handling problems 253  
   
Paper does not feed from Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5  
Cause  
Solution  
None of the optional trays appear as input tray options.  
The optional trays only display as available if they are installed.  
Verify that any optional trays are correctly installed. Verify that  
the printer driver has been configured to recognize the optional  
trays.  
An optional tray is incorrectly installed.  
Print a configuration page to confirm that the optional tray is  
installed. If not, verify that the tray is correctly attached to the  
product.  
The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray.  
The guides in the tray are not against the paper.  
Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine  
the paper size for which the tray is configured.  
Verify that the guides are touching the paper.  
Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed  
Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed  
Cause  
Solution  
The correct paper type is not specified in the software or printer Verify that the correct paper type is selected in the software or  
driver.  
printer driver.  
The input tray is overfilled.  
Remove excess paper from the input tray. Do not load more  
than 200 sheets of glossy paper or glossy film, or more than  
100 transparencies in Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5. Do not exceed the  
maximum stack height marks for Tray 1.  
Paper in another input tray is the same size as the  
Make sure that the input tray containing the transparencies or  
transparencies, and the product is defaulting to the other tray. glossy paper is selected in the software program or printer  
driver. Use the product control panel to configure the tray to  
the paper type loaded.  
The tray containing the transparencies or glossy paper is not Make sure that the input tray containing the transparencies or  
configured correctly for type.  
glossy paper is selected in the software program or printer  
driver. Use the product control panel to configure the tray to  
the paper type loaded.  
Transparencies or glossy paper might not meet supported  
paper specifications.  
Use only paper that meets the HP paper specifications for this  
product.  
High-humidity environments may cause glossy paper not to  
feed, or to feed too many sheets.  
Print glossy paper from Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5 for best results.  
Avoid printing glossy paper in high humidity conditions. When  
printing glossy paper, removing the paper from the wrapper  
and letting it rest for a few hours can improve feeding into the  
product. However, letting paper rest in humid environments  
may also cause blisters.  
CAUTION: HP Color Laser Presentation Paper, Glossy (Q2546A) is not supported with this product.  
Using this type of paper can cause a fuser jam that might require the replacement of the fuser. Two  
recommended alternatives are HP Color LaserJet Presentation Paper, Soft Gloss (Q6541A) and  
HP Color LaserJet Brochure Paper, Glossy (Q6611A, Q6610A). For a list of supported paper types, see  
254 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
 
Envelopes jam or will not feed in the product  
Envelopes jam or will not feed in the product  
Cause  
Solution  
Envelopes are loaded in an unsupported tray. Only Tray 1 can Load envelopes into Tray 1.  
feed envelopes.  
Envelopes are curled or damaged.  
Try using different envelopes. Store envelopes in a controlled  
environment.  
Envelopes are sealing because the moisture content is too  
high.  
Try using different envelopes. Store envelopes in a controlled  
environment.  
Envelope orientation is incorrect.  
Verify that the envelope is loaded correctly.  
Refer to the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide.  
Configure Tray 1 size for envelopes.  
This product does not support the envelopes being used.  
Tray 1 is configured for a size other than envelopes.  
Output is curled or wrinkled  
Output is curled or wrinkled  
Cause  
Solution  
Paper does not meet the specifications for this product.  
Use only paper that meets the HP paper specifications for this  
product.  
Paper is damaged or in poor condition.  
Product speed needs to be reduced.  
Remove paper from the input tray and load paper that is in  
good condition.  
Set the PAPER CURL option in the Print Quality menu to  
REDUCED to decrease full speed to 10 ppm (instead of 40  
ppm) and 3/4 speed to 7.5 ppm (instead of 30 ppm).  
Product is operating in an excessively humid environment.  
You are printing large, solid-filled areas.  
Verify that the printing environment is within humidity  
specifications.  
Large, solid-filled areas can cause excessive curl. Try using a  
different pattern.  
Paper used was not stored correctly and might have absorbed Remove paper and replace it with paper from a fresh,  
moisture.  
unopened package.  
Paper has poorly cut edges.  
Remove paper, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or turn it over, and  
then reload it into the input tray. Do not fan paper. If the problem  
persists, replace the paper.  
The specific paper type was not configured for the tray or  
selected in the software.  
Configure the software for the paper (see the software  
documentation). Configure the tray for the paper, see Load  
The paper has previously been used for a print job.  
Do not re-use paper.  
ENWW  
Paper-handling problems 255  
   
Product will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly  
Product will not duplex (print 2-sided jobs) or duplexes incorrectly  
Cause  
Solution  
You are trying to duplex on unsupported paper.  
The printer driver is not set up for duplex printing.  
Verify that the paper is supported for duplex printing.  
Set up the printer driver to enable duplex printing.  
The first page is printing on the back of preprinted forms or  
letterhead.  
Load preprinted forms and letterhead in Tray 1 with the  
letterhead or printed side down, with the top of the page toward  
the back of the product. For Tray 2, 3, 4 and 5, load the paper  
printed side up with the top of the page toward the back of the  
product.  
The product model does not support automatic 2-sided  
printing.  
The HP Color LaserJet CM6049f MFP does not support  
automatic 2-sided printing.  
The product configuration is not set for duplexing.  
In Windows, run the automatic configuration feature:  
1. Click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click  
Printers (for Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (for  
Windows XP).  
2. Right-click the HP product icon, and then click  
Properties or Printing Preferences.  
3. Click the Device Settings tab.  
4. Under Installable Options, click Update Now in the  
Automatic Configuration list.  
256 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
 
Understand lights on the formatter  
Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the product is functioning correctly.  
1
2
1
2
Heartbeat LED  
HP Jetdirect LEDs (This LED exists only if HP Jetdirect is installed.)  
HP Jetdirect LEDs  
The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and  
the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED  
is off, a link has failed.  
For link failures, check all of the network cable connections. In addition, you can try to manually configure  
the link settings on the embedded print server by using the product control-panel menus.  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Touch Initial Setup.  
3. Touch Networking and I/O.  
4. Touch Embedded Jetdirect or EIO <X> Jetdirect.  
5. Touch Link Speed.  
6. Select the appropriate link speed.  
7. Touch Save.  
Heartbeat LED  
The heartbeat LED indicates that the formatter is functioning correctly. While the product is initializing  
after you turn it on, the LED blinks rapidly, and then turns off. When the product has finished the  
initialization sequence, the heartbeat LED pulses on and off.  
If the heartbeat LED is off, the formatter might have a problem. Replace or reseat the formatter.  
ENWW  
Understand lights on the formatter 257  
         
Correct print quality and copy quality problems  
The following procedures help you define print quality problems and what to do to correct them. Often  
print quality problems can be handled easily by making sure that the product is properly maintained,  
using print media that meets HP specifications, or running a cleaning page.  
Example print quality problems  
Some print quality problems arise from use of inappropriate paper.  
Use paper that meets HP paper specifications.  
The surface of the paper is too rough. Use paper that meets HP paper specifications.  
The printer driver setting or paper tray setting might be incorrect. Be sure that you have configured  
the paper tray at the product control panel and have also selected the correct driver setting for the  
paper that you are using.  
The print mode might be set incorrectly, or the paper might not meet recommended specifications.  
The transparencies you are using are not designed for proper toner adhesion. Use only  
transparencies designed for HP Color LaserJet products.  
The moisture content of the paper is uneven, too high, or too low. Use paper from a different source  
or from an unopened ream of paper.  
Some areas of the paper reject toner. Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream  
of paper.  
The letterhead you are using is printed on rough paper. Use a smoother, xerographic paper. If this  
solves your problem, consult with the printer of your letterhead to verify that the paper used meets  
the specifications for this product.  
Several optimize print modes can be used to address print quality issues. See Print Quality menu  
Repetitive defects ruler  
If defects repeat at regular intervals on the page, use this ruler to identify the cause of the defect. Place  
the top of the ruler at the first defect. The marking that is beside the next occurrence of the defect  
indicates which component needs to be replaced.  
258 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
       
(0)  
(36mm)  
(40mm)  
(50mm)  
(71mm)  
(82mm)  
(94mm)  
(144mm)  
(148mm)  
36 mm  
Developer roller in an image drum.  
The print quality defect will be in one of the four image drums (image drum).  
Charge roller in an image drum.  
40 mm  
The print quality defect will be spots or dots sometimes caused when feeding labels and will be in one of the four  
image drums (image drum).  
50 mm  
71 mm  
82 mm  
94 mm  
Transfer 1 roller in the transfer unit (transfer kit).  
Transfer 2 roller in the roller kit (transfer kit).  
Tension in the transfer unit (transfer kit).  
Image drum.  
The print quality defect will be in one of the four image drums (image drum).  
Pressure roller in the fuser (fuser kit).  
144 mm  
148 mm  
Fusing roller in the fuser (fuser kit).  
ENWW  
Correct print quality and copy quality problems 259  
To identify if the image drum is the problem, insert an image drum from another HP Color LaserJet  
CM6049f, if one is available, before ordering a new image drum.  
If the defect repeats at 94.0 mm (3.75 inch) intervals, try replacing the image drum before replacing the  
fuser.  
Print quality problems associated with the environment  
If the product is operating in excessively humid or dry conditions, verify that the printing environment is  
within specifications. See Environmental specifications on page 281. Several optimization modes can  
also help with environmental conditions. See Use manual print modes on page 264.  
Print quality problems associated with jams  
Make sure that all paper is cleared from the paper path.  
If the product recently jammed, print two to three pages to clean the product.  
The paper does not pass through the fuser, causing image defects to appear on subsequent  
documents. Print two to three pages to clean the product.  
Optimize and improve image quality  
The following procedures can be used to solve most image quality problems.  
Use supported paper  
Using unsupported paper or other media in the product can cause a wide variety of image quality  
problems.  
Calibrate the product  
Calibration is a product function that optimizes print quality. If you experience any image-quality  
problems, calibrate the product.  
At the control panel;  
1. Touch Administration.  
2. Scroll and touch Print Quality.  
3. Scroll and touch Calibration/Cleaning .  
4. Touch Quick Calibration or Full Calibration.  
5. Touch Calibrate.  
Specify the correct paper type  
When you send a print job to the product, specify the type of paper you are using.  
1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print.  
2. Select the product, and then click Properties or Preferences.  
NOTE: The steps can vary; this procedure is most common.  
260 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
           
3. Select the Paper/Quality tab.  
4. In the Paper Type drop-down box, select More... and then select the paper type that best matches  
the paper that is loaded in the product.  
Clean the fuser  
Run the device cleaning page to keep the fuser free of toner and paper particles that can sometimes  
accumulate. Accumulation of toner and particles can cause specks to appear on the front or back side  
of your print jobs.  
HP recommends that you use the cleaning page when there is a print quality issue.  
A Cleaning message appears on the product control panel display while the cleaning is taking place.  
In order for the cleaning page to work correctly, print the page on copier-grade paper (not bond, heavy,  
or rough paper).  
Create and use the cleaning page  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
2. Scroll to and touch Print Quality  
3. Touch Calibration/cleaning.  
4. Touch Process cleaning page.  
Respond to control panel error messages  
If you see a 54.Error <XX> message in the event log, you might need to perform some maintenance  
on the product in order to avoid more errors and solve print quality problems.  
1. Open and then close the right door of the product to log a 54.Error <XX> as the latest event in the  
event log.  
2. Scroll to and touch Administration.  
3. Scroll to and touch Troubleshooting.  
4. Scroll to and touch Event Log.  
5. Touch Print.  
6. Find the most recent event in the log.  
If the event is a 54.OE.01 Media Sensor event, you need to replace the registration second  
transfer assembly.  
If the event is a 54.OE.02 Media Sensor event, you need to replace the product transfer kit.  
If the event is a 54.OE.03 Media Sensor event, you need to clean the registration second  
transfer assembly and the media sensor using the following procedure.  
ENWW  
Correct print quality and copy quality problems 261  
     
Clean the registration second transfer assembly  
1. Open the right door.  
2. Locate and remove the cleaning brush.  
3. Lift the green handle on the transfer-access panel and open the panel.  
1
2
262 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
 
4. Clean the media sensor with the cleaning brush.  
5. Close the transfer access panel, and replace the cleaning brush in its holder.  
6. Close the right door.  
ENWW  
Correct print quality and copy quality problems 263  
Use manual print modes  
Try the following manual print modes to see if they solve the image quality problems. These options can  
be found in the Optimize sub-menu under the control panel Print Quality menu. See Print Quality menu  
Fuser Temp: If you are seeing a faint image of the page repeated at the bottom of the page or on  
the following page, you should first make sure the Paper Type and Print Mode settings are correct  
for the type of paper you are using. If you continue to see ghost images on your print jobs, set the  
Fuser Temp feature to one of the Alternate settings . Try the Alternate 1 setting first and see if it  
solves the problem. If you continue to see the problem, try Alternate 2 and then Alternate 3. With  
the Alternate 2 and Alternate 3 settings you may see an extra delay between jobs.  
Light Media: Set this feature to On if you are frequently seeing Fuser Delay Jam or Fuser Wrap  
Jam messages, especially when printing on light-weight paper or on jobs with heavy toner  
coverage.  
Media Temp: Set this feature to Reduced if you are having problems with paper sticking together  
in the output bin.  
Environment: Enable this feature if the product is operating in a low temperature environment and  
you are having problems with print quality such as blisters in the printed image.  
Line Voltage: Enable this feature if the product is operating in a low voltage environment and you  
are having problems with print quality such as blisters in the printed image.  
Background: Turn this feature on if pages are printing with a shaded background. Using this  
feature can reduce gloss levels.  
Paper Curl: Set this feature to Reduced if excessive curling of paper in the output bin occurs. This  
setting will reduce printing speed and increase the frequency of consumable replacement.  
Pre-rotation: Turn this feature on if horizontal streaks appear on pages. Using this feature  
increases the warm-up time for the device.  
Tray 1: If you are seeing marks on the back side of the paper or extra toner on pages when printing  
from Tray 1, set the mode to Alternate. When the mode is set to Alternate a cleaning cycle will be  
performed after each job that is printed from Tray 1. Using Alternate mode increase wear on all the  
print cartridges.  
Tracking Control: This setting should always be set to On.  
Cleaning Frequency = Normal/Alternate: Set this feature to Alternate if you are seeing defects  
in the printed output that repeat at 38 mm (1.5 inch) intervals. This feature increases the frequency  
at which the C roller is cleaned. Setting this feature to Alternate might also reduce printing speed  
and increase the frequency of consumable replacement.  
D-Blade Bias = Normal/Alternate: Set this feature to Alternate if you are seeing short, white,  
vertical lines in the printed output. The Alternate setting might also cause dark spots in the printed  
output, so be sure to test this setting on a few print jobs.  
Waste Bin = Normal/Alternate: Try setting this feature to Alternate if you are seeing lengthwise  
toner streaks in your printed output, especially in jobs with low toner coverage.  
Discharge Brush = Off/On: Enable this feature in low temperature and low humidity environments  
if you are seeing specks of toner scattered on double-sided jobs using lightweight paper and longer  
than ten pages.  
264 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
 
Print-quality-troubleshooting pages  
Use the built-in print-quality-troubleshooting pages to help diagnose and solve print-quality problems.  
1. Scroll to and touch Administration  
2. Scroll to and touch Troubleshooting.  
3. Touch PQ Troubleshooting.  
4. Touch Print.  
The product returns to the Ready state after printing the print-quality-troubleshooting pages. Follow the  
instructions on the pages that print out.  
ENWW  
Correct print quality and copy quality problems 265  
 
Performance problems  
Problem  
Cause  
Solution  
Pages print but are totally blank.  
The sealing tape might still be in the print Verify that the sealing tape has been  
cartridges.  
completely removed from the print  
cartridges.  
The document might contain blank  
pages.  
Check the document that you are printing  
to see if content appears on all of the  
pages.  
The product might be malfunctioning.  
To check the product, print a  
Configuration page.  
Pages print very slowly.  
Heavier media types can slow the print  
job.  
Print on a different type of media.  
Complex pages can print slowly.  
Proper fusing may require a slower print  
speed to ensure the best print quality.  
The RLT photo fix options under HP  
real life technologies on the Paper/  
Quality tab of the print driver can cause  
slow printing.  
De-select these options to improve print  
speed.  
Pages did not print.  
The product might not be pulling media Make sure paper is loaded in the tray  
correctly.  
correctly.  
If the problem persists, the pickup rollers  
and the separation pad might need to be  
replaced.  
The media is jamming in the device.  
Clear the jam. See Jams on page 222.  
The USB cable might be defective or  
incorrectly connected.  
Disconnect the USB cable at both  
ends and reconnect it.  
Try printing a job that has printed in  
the past.  
Try using a different USB cable.  
Other devices are running on your  
computer.  
The product might not share a USB port.  
If you have an external hard drive or  
network switchbox that is connected to  
the same port as the product, the other  
device might be interfering. To connect  
and use the product, you must  
disconnect the other device or you must  
use two USB ports on the computer.  
266 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
         
Solve fax problems  
For help solving fax problems, go to www.hp.com/go/mfpfaxaccessory300.  
You can also refer to the Analog Fax Accessory 300 Fax Guide and the Analog Fax Accessory 300  
Send Fax Driver Guide.  
Solve e-mail problems  
If you are unable to send e-mails by using the digital-send feature, you might need to reconfigure the  
SMTP gateway address or the LDAP gateway address. Print a configuration page to find the current  
SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses. See Information pages on page 176. Use the following  
procedures to check if the SMTP and LDAP gateway addresses are valid.  
Validate the SMTP gateway address  
NOTE: This procedure is for Windows operating systems.  
1. Open an MS-DOS command prompt: click Start, click Run, and then type cmd.  
2. Type telnetfollowed by the SMTP gateway address and then the number 25, which is the port  
over which the product is communicating. For example, type telnet 123.123.123.123 25  
where "123.123.123.123" represents the SMTP gateway address.  
3. Press Enter. If the SMTP gateway address is not valid, the response contains the message Could  
not open connection to the host on port 25: Connect Failed.  
4. If the SMTP gateway address is not valid, contact the network administrator.  
Validate the LDAP gateway address  
NOTE: This procedure is for Windows operating systems.  
1. Open Windows Explorer. In the address bar, type LDAP://immediately followed by the LDAP  
gateway address. For example, type LDAP://12.12.12.12where "12.12.12.12" represents the  
LDAP gateway address.  
2. Press Enter. If the LDAP gateway address is valid, the Find People dialog box opens.  
3. If the LDAP gateway address is not valid, contact the network administrator.  
ENWW  
Solve fax problems 267  
         
Solve network connectivity problems  
If the product is having problems communicating with the network, use the information in this section to  
resolve the problem.  
Solve network printing problems  
Make sure that the network cable is securely seated into the product's RJ45 connector.  
Make sure that the Link LED on the formatter is lit. See Understand lights on the formatter  
Make sure that the I/O card is ready. Print a configuration page (see Information pages  
on page 176). If an HP Jetdirect print server is installed, printing a configuration page also prints  
a second page that shows the network settings and status.  
NOTE: The HP Jetdirect print server supports various network protocols (TCP/IP, IPX/SPX,  
Novell NetWare, AppleTalk, and DCL/LLC). Make sure that the correct protocols and network  
parameters are set correctly.  
On the HP Jetdirect configuration page, verify the following items for your protocol:  
Under HP Jetdirect Configuration, the status is "I/O Card Ready."  
Protocol status is "Ready."  
An IP address is listed.  
The configuration method (Config by:) is listed correctly. See the network administrator if you  
are not sure which method is correct.  
Try printing the job from another computer.  
To verify that a product works with a computer, use a USB cable to connect it directly to a computer.  
You will have to reinstall the printing software. Print a document from a program that has printed  
correctly in the past. If this works, a problem with the network might exist.  
Contact your network administrator for assistance.  
Verify communication over the network  
If the HP Jetdirect configuration page shows an IP address for the product, use this procedure to verify  
that you can communicate with the product over the network.  
1. Windows: Click Start, click Run, and then type cmd. An MS-DOS command prompt opens.  
-or-  
Mac: Click Applications, click Utilities, and then open the Terminal application. The terminal  
window opens.  
2. Type pingfollowed by the IP address. For example, type ping XXX.XXX.XXX.XXXwhere  
"XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX" is the IPv4 address that is shown on the HP Jetdirect configuration page. If  
the product is communicating over the network, the response is a list of replies from the product.  
3. Verify that the IP address is not a duplicate address on the network by using the address resolution  
protocol (arp -a) command. At the prompt, type arp -a. Find the IP address in the list and compare  
its physical address to the hardware address that is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page  
268 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
     
in the section called HP Jetdirect Configuration. If the addresses match, all network  
communications are valid.  
4. If you cannot verify that the product is communicating over the network, contact the network  
administrator.  
ENWW  
Solve network connectivity problems 269  
Solve common Macintosh problems  
This section lists problems that can occur when using Mac OS X.  
Table 15-1 Problems with Mac OS X  
The printer driver is not listed in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
Cause  
Solution  
The product software might not have been installed or was installed Make sure that the product PPD is in the following hard-drive folder:  
Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/  
<lang>.lproj, where <lang> is the two-letter language code for  
the language that you are using. If necessary, reinstall the software.  
See the getting started guide for instructions.  
incorrectly.  
The Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file is corrupt.  
Delete the PPD file from the following hard-drive folder: Library/  
Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/<lang>.lproj,  
where <lang> is the two-letter language code for the language that  
you are using. Reinstall the software. See the getting started guide  
for instructions.  
The product name, IP address, or Rendezvous/Bonjour host name does not appear in the product list in the Print Center or Printer  
Setup Utility.  
Cause  
Solution  
The product might not be ready.  
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the product is on,  
and the ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or  
Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different  
port.  
The wrong connection type might be selected.  
Make sure that USB, IP Printing, or Rendezvous/Bonjour is selected,  
depending on the type of connection that exists between the product  
and the computer.  
The wrong product name, IP address, or Rendezvous/Bonjour host Print a configuration page in order to check the product name, IP  
name is being used.  
address, or Rendezvous host name. Verify that the name, IP address,  
or Rendezvous host name on the configuration page matches the  
product name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name in the Print  
Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality.  
Replace the interface cable. Make sure to use a high-quality cable.  
The printer driver does not automatically set up your selected product in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
Cause  
Solution  
The product might not be ready.  
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly, the product is on,  
and the ready light is on. If you are connecting through a USB or  
Ethernet hub, try connecting directly to the computer or use a different  
port.  
The product software might not have been installed or was installed Make sure that the product PPD is in the following hard-drive folder:  
Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/  
<lang>.lproj, where <lang> is the two-letter language code for  
the language that you are using. If necessary, reinstall the software.  
See the getting started guide for instructions.  
incorrectly.  
270 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
     
Table 15-1 Problems with Mac OS X (continued)  
The printer driver does not automatically set up your selected product in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
Cause  
Solution  
The Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file is corrupt.  
Delete the PPD file from the following hard-drive folder: Library/  
Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/<lang>.lproj,  
where <lang> is the two-letter language code for the language that  
you are using. Reinstall the software. See the getting started guide  
for instructions.  
The interface cable might be defective or of poor quality.  
Replace the interface cable. Make sure to use a high-quality cable.  
A print job was not sent to the product that you wanted.  
Cause  
Solution  
The print queue might be stopped.  
Restart the print queue. Open print monitor and select Start Jobs.  
The wrong product name or IP address is being used. Another  
Print a configuration page in order to check the product name, IP  
product with the same or similar name, IP address, or Rendezvous address, or Rendezvous host name. Verify that the name, IP address,  
host name might have received your print job.  
or Rendezvous host name on the configuration page matches the  
product name, IP address, or Rendezvous host name in the Print  
Center or Printer Setup Utility.  
An encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file does not print with the correct fonts.  
Cause  
Solution  
This problem occurs with some programs.  
Try downloading the fonts that are contained in the EPS file to  
the product before printing.  
Send the file in ASCII format instead of binary encoding.  
You are unable to print from a third-party USB card.  
Cause  
Solution  
This error occurs when the software for USB products is not  
installed.  
When adding a third-party USB card, you might need the Apple USB  
Adapter Card Support software. The most current version of this  
software is available from the Apple Web site.  
ENWW  
Solve common Macintosh problems 271  
   
Table 15-1 Problems with Mac OS X (continued)  
When connected with a USB cable, the product does not appear in the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility after the driver is selected.  
Cause  
Solution  
This problem is caused by either a software or a hardware  
component.  
Software troubleshooting  
Check that your Macintosh supports USB.  
Verify that your Macintosh operating system is Mac OS X v10.3  
or later.  
Ensure that your Macintosh has the appropriate USB software  
from Apple.  
Hardware troubleshooting  
Check that the product is turned on.  
Verify that the USB cable is connected correctly.  
Check that you are using the appropriate high-speed USB cable.  
Ensure that you do not have too many USB devices drawing  
power from the chain. Disconnect all of the devices from the  
chain, and connect the cable directly to the USB port on the host  
computer.  
Check to see if more than two nonpowered USB hubs are  
connected in a row on the chain. Disconnect all of the devices  
from the chain and connect the cable directly to the USB port on  
the host computer.  
NOTE: The iMac keyboard is a nonpowered USB hub.  
272 Chapter 15 Solve problems  
ENWW  
A Supplies and accessories  
ENWW  
273  
 
Order parts, accessories, and supplies  
To order parts, accessories, and supplies, contact your dealer.  
274 Appendix A Supplies and accessories  
ENWW  
 
Part numbers  
Ordering information and availability might change during the life of the product.  
Accessories  
Item  
Description  
Part number  
HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker Accessory  
3-bin stapler/stacker with output  
accessory bridge unit  
CC517A  
HP 3-bin Stapler/Stacker or HP Booklet 5000-staple replacement cartridge  
Maker/Finisher staple cartridge (upper  
C8091A  
cartridge on HP Booklet Maker/Finisher)  
HP Booklet Maker/Finisher Accessory  
Booklet maker finisher with output  
accessory bridge unit  
CC516A  
CC383A  
Q3701A  
HP Booklet Maker/Finisher saddle-stitch 2000-staple replacement cartridge  
staple cartridge (lower cartridge)  
(quantity of 2)  
HP LaserJet analog fax accessory 300  
Provides fax capability for the product.  
Print cartridges  
Item  
Description  
Part number  
HP Color LaserJet black print cartridge  
HP Color LaserJet cyan print cartridge  
19,500-page black cartridge  
21,000-page cyan cartridge  
CE830C  
CE301C  
CE302C  
CE303C  
HP Color LaserJet yellow print cartridge 21,000-page yellow cartridge  
HP Color LaserJet magenta print  
cartridge  
21,000-page magenta cartridge  
Image drums  
Item  
Description  
Part number  
HP Color LaserJet black image drum  
HP Color LaserJet cyan image drum  
HP Color LaserJet yellow image drum  
35,000-page black image drum  
35,000-page cyan image drum  
35,000-page yellow image drum  
CE304C  
CE305C  
CE306C  
CE307C  
HP Color LaserJet magenta image drum 35,000-page magenta image drum  
Maintenance kits  
Item  
Description  
Part number  
Image fuser kit  
Image fuser kit  
110 volt  
220 volt  
CB457A  
CB458A  
ENWW  
Part numbers 275  
                 
Item  
Description  
Part number  
Roller kit  
CB459A  
CB463A  
CE487A  
Transfer kit  
ADF roller kit  
Memory  
Item  
Description  
Part number  
200-pin DDR memory DIMM (dual inline 128 MB  
memory module)  
256 MB  
Q7557A  
Q7558A  
Boosts the ability of the product to handle  
large or complex print jobs.  
Cables and interfaces  
Item  
Description  
Part number  
Enhanced I/O (EIO) card  
HP Jetdirect 635n IPv6/IPsec Print  
Server  
J7961G  
USB cable  
2-meter standard USB-compatible  
device connector  
C6518A  
276 Appendix A Supplies and accessories  
ENWW  
         
Physical specifications  
Table B-1 Product dimensions  
Product  
Height  
1194 mm (47 in)  
Depth  
Width  
Weight1  
HP Color LaserJet CM6049f MFP  
Without print cartridge  
635 mm (25 in)  
704 mm (27.7 in)  
145 kg (319 lb)  
1
Table B-2 Product dimensions, with all doors and trays fully opened  
Product  
Height  
Depth  
1079.5 mm (42.5 in)  
Width  
983 mm (38.7 in)  
HP Color LaserJet CM6049f MFP  
1524 mm (60 in)  
278 Appendix B Product specifications  
ENWW  
   
Electrical specifications  
WARNING! Power requirements are based on the country/region where the product is sold. Do not  
convert operating voltages. This can damage the product and void the product warranty.  
Table B-3 Power requirements (HP Color LaserJet CM6049f MFP)  
Specification  
110-volt models  
220-volt models  
Power requirements  
100 to 127 volts (± 10%)  
50/60 Hz (± 2 Hz)  
10.5 A  
220 to 240 volts (± 10%)  
50/60 Hz (± 2 Hz)  
5.5 A  
Rated current  
Table B-4 Power consumption HP Color LaserJet CM6049f MFP (average, in watts)  
Product model  
Printing  
Ready  
Sleep  
Off  
HP Color LaserJet  
CM6049f MFP  
1265 W  
251.7 W  
26.5 W  
0.72 W  
Values subject to change. See www.hp.com/support/cljcm6049mfp for current information.  
Printing and copying speeds are 40 ppm for Letter and A4 sizes.  
Default time from Ready mode to Sleep mode = 60 minutes.  
Recovery time from Sleep mode = less than 20 seconds  
ENWW  
Electrical specifications 279  
   
Acoustic specifications  
Table B-5 Sound power and pressure level1 (HP Color LaserJet CM6049f MFP)  
Sound power level  
Declared per ISO 9296  
Printing1  
LWAd= 7.1 Bels (A) [71 dB(A)]  
LWAd= 7.1 Bels (A) [71 dB(A)]  
LWAd= 4.7 Bels (A) [47 dB(A)]  
Declared per ISO 9296  
LpAm=50 dB (A)  
Copying2  
Ready  
Sound pressure level  
Printing1  
Copying2  
LpAm=52 dB (A)  
Ready  
LpAm=37 dB (A)  
1
2
Values subject to change. See www.hp.com/support/cljcm6049mfp for current information.  
Configuration tested: Base model, simplex copying from ADF with A4 paper size.  
280 Appendix B Product specifications  
ENWW  
       
Environmental specifications  
Environmental condition  
Recommended  
Allowed  
Storage/standby  
Temperature (product and  
print cartridge)  
17° to 25°C (62.6° to 77°F)  
10° to 30°C (50° to 86°F)  
0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F)  
Relative humidity  
30% to 70% relative humidity 10% to 80% RH  
(RH)  
5% to 95%  
N/A  
Altitude  
N/A  
0 meters (0 feet) to 2500  
meters (8000 feet)  
ENWW  
Environmental specifications 281  
   
282 Appendix B Product specifications  
ENWW  
C Regulatory information  
ENWW  
283  
 
Compliance with FCC regulations  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant  
to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful  
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,  
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this  
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be  
required to correct the interference at his own expense.  
284 Appendix C Regulatory information  
ENWW  
 
Declaration of Conformity  
Declaration of Conformity  
according to ISO/IEC 17050–1 and EN 17050–1  
Manufacturer's Name:  
Hewlett-Packard Company  
DoC#: BOISB-0601–02–rel.6.0  
11311 Chinden Boulevard,  
Manufacturer's Address:  
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA  
declares that the product  
Product Name:  
Accessories:3)  
HP Color LaserJet CM6030/CM6040/CM4349 MFP series  
CB473A – 1x500-sheet input tray/stand  
CB474A – 3x500-sheet input tray/stand  
Q6999A/CC516A – Booklet Maker  
Q6998A/CC517A – 3-Bin Stapler/Stacker  
BOISB-0308-00 – Fax Module  
Regulatory Model Number:2)  
Product Options:  
BOISB-0601-02  
ALL  
Toner Cartridges/Drums: CB390A, CB381A, CB382A, CB383A, CB384A, CB385A, CB386A,  
CB387A, CE830C, CE301C, CE302C, CE303C, CE304C, CE305C, CE306C, CE307C  
conforms to the following Product Specifications:  
Safety:  
IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001 + A11  
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A1 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)  
GB4943-2001  
CISPR 22:2005 / EN 55022:2006 – Class A1)  
EN 61000-3-2:2006  
EMC:  
EN 61000-3-3:1995 + A1  
EN 55024:1998+A1 + A2  
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A / ICES-003, Issue 4  
GB9254-1998, GB17625.1–2003  
TBR-21:1998; FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 684)  
Telecom  
Supplementary Information:  
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, and the  
R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II), and carries the CE-Marking  
accordingly.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful  
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.  
2) For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name  
or the product number(s).  
3) All worldwide modular approvals for analog fax accessory obtained by Hewlett-Packard under the regulatory model number BOISB-0308-00  
incorporate the Multi-Tech Systems MT5634SMI Socket Modem Module.  
4) Telecom approvals and standards appropriate for the target countries/regions have been applied to this product, in addition to those listed  
above.  
Boise, Idaho , USA  
March 2009  
For regulatory topics only:  
European Contact: Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-TRE / Standards  
Europe, Herrenberger Straße 140, D-71034 Böblingen, Germany, (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143) www.hp.com/go/  
USA Contact:  
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho 83707-0015, USA,  
(Phone: 208-396-6000)  
ENWW  
Declaration of Conformity 285  
 
Environmental product stewardship program  
Protecting the environment  
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound  
manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment.  
Ozone production  
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O3).  
Power consumption  
Power usage drops significantly while in Ready and Sleep mode, which saves natural resources and  
saves money without affecting the high performance of this product. To determine the ENERGY STAR®  
qualification status for this product, see the Product Data Sheet or Specifications Sheet. Qualified  
products are also listed at:  
Toner consumption  
EconoMode uses less toner, which might extend the life of the print cartridge.  
Paper use  
This product’s optional automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) and N-up printing (multiple pages  
printed on one page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural  
resources.  
Plastics  
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to  
identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.  
HP LaserJet print supplies  
It’s easy to return and recycle your empty HP LaserJet print cartridges—free of charge—with HP Planet  
Partners. Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print  
cartridge and supplies package. You help reduce the toll on the environment further when you return  
multiple cartridges together rather than separately.  
HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that are environmentally  
sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, customer use, and recycling. When you  
participate in the HP Planet Partners program, we ensure your HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled  
properly, processing them to recover plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons  
of waste from landfills. Please note that the cartridge will not be returned to you. Thank you for being  
environmentally responsible!  
NOTE: Use the return label to return original HP LaserJet print cartridges only. Please do not use this  
label for HP inkjet cartridges, non-HP cartridges, refilled or remanufactured cartridges, or warranty  
returns. For information about recycling your HP inkjet cartridges, please go to www.hp.com/recycle.  
286 Appendix C Regulatory information  
ENWW  
                 
Return and recycling instructions  
United States and Puerto Rico  
The enclosed label in the HP LaserJet toner cartridge box is for the return and recycling of one or more  
HP LaserJet print cartridges after use. Please follow the applicable instructions below.  
Multiple returns (more than one cartridge)  
1. Package each HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original box and bag.  
2. Tape the boxes together using strapping or packaging tape. The package can weigh up to 31 kg  
(70 lb).  
3. Use a single pre-paid shipping label.  
OR  
1. Use your own suitable box, or request a free bulk collection box from www.hp.com/recycle or  
1-800-340-2445 (holds up to 31 kg (70 lb) of HP LaserJet print cartridges).  
2. Use a single pre-paid shipping label.  
Single returns  
1. Package the HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original bag and box.  
2. Place the shipping label on the front of the box.  
Shipping  
For all HP LaserJet print cartridge recycling returns, give the package to UPS during your next delivery  
or pickup, or take it to an authorized UPS drop-off center. For the location of your local UPS drop-off  
center, call 1-800-PICKUPS or visit www.ups.com. If you are returning via USPS label, give the package  
to a U.S. Postal Service carrier or drop off at a U.S. Postal Service Office. For more information, or to  
order additional labels or boxes for bulk returns, visit www.hp.com/recycle or call 1-800-340-2445.  
Requested UPS pickup will be charged normal pickup rates. Information subject to change without  
notice.  
Non-U.S. returns  
To participate in HP Planet Partners return and recycling program, just follow the simple directions in  
the recycling guide (found inside the packaging of your new product supply item) or visit www.hp.com/  
recycle. Select your country/region for information on how to return your HP LaserJet printing supplies.  
Paper  
This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the  
HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper  
according to EN12281:2002.  
Material restrictions  
This HP product contains a battery that may require special handling at end-of-life.  
The battery contained in this product includes:  
ENWW  
Environmental product stewardship program 287  
               
Type  
Carbon monofluoride lithium battery  
Weight  
0.8 grams  
Formatter board  
No  
Location  
User removable  
This product contains mercury in the fluorescent lamp of the control panel liquid crystal display that  
might require special handling at end-of-life.  
For recycling information you can visit www.hp.com/go/recycle or contact your local authorities or the  
Electronics Industry Alliance (www.eiae.org).  
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the  
European Union  
This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with  
your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by  
handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic  
equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will  
help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health  
and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for  
recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where  
you purchased the product.  
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)  
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies containing chemical substances (for example, toner)  
can be obtained by accessing the HP Web site at www.hp.com/go/msds or www.hp.com/hpinfo/  
288 Appendix C Regulatory information  
ENWW  
     
For more information  
To obtain information about these environmental topics:  
Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products  
HP’s commitment to the environment  
HP’s environmental management system  
HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program  
Material Safety Data Sheets  
ENWW  
Environmental product stewardship program 289  
 
Certificate of volatility  
This is a statement regarding the volatility of customer data stored in memory. It also outlines how to  
erase secure data from the device.  
Types of memory  
Volatile memory  
The MFP utilizes volatile memory (64MB on the board and 256MB installed, for a total of 320MB) to  
store customer data during the printing and copying process. When the MFP is powered off, this volatile  
memory is erased.  
Non-volatile memory  
The MFP utilizes non-volatile memory (EEPROM) to store system control data and user preference  
settings. No customer print or copy data is stored in non-volatile memory. This non-volatile memory can  
be cleared and restored to factory defaults by performing a Cold Reset or Restore Factory Defaults from  
the control panel.  
Hard-disk-drive memory  
The MFP contains an internal hard disk drive (40GB or larger) that may retain data after the MFP is  
powered off. The MFP also may contain additional optional compact flash storage, or an external EIO  
hard disk. Data stored in these devices may be from incoming/outgoing fax or email files, stored copy  
or print jobs, fax or email address books, or third-party solutions. Some of this data can be erased from  
the control panel of the MFP, but most must be erased using the Secure Storage Erase features  
available within HP Web Jetadmin. Secure Storage Erase features comply with U.S. Department of  
Defense (DOD) specification 5220–22.M.  
290 Appendix C Regulatory information  
ENWW  
         
Safety statements  
Laser safety  
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has  
implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is  
mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certified as a “Class 1” laser product  
under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard  
according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the  
device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot  
escape during any phase of normal user operation.  
WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified  
in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.  
Canadian DOC regulations  
Complies with Canadian EMC Class A requirements.  
« Conforme à la classe A des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques. « CEM ». »  
VCCI statement (Japan)  
Power cord statement (Japan)  
EMC statement (Korea)  
EMI statement (Taiwan)  
ENWW  
Safety statements 291  
                       
General telecom statement  
The HP Color LaserJet CM6049f MFP has the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 already installed  
to provide communication to the public switch telephone network (PSTN) for fax functionality. See the  
HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 300 User Guide for all regulatory approval information and  
regulatory notices associated with the fax functionality and that device.  
Laser statement for Finland  
Luokan 1 laserlaite  
Klass 1 Laser Apparat  
HP LaserJet CM6049f, laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa  
käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen  
turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti.  
VAROITUS !  
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän  
turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.  
VARNING !  
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för  
osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.  
HUOLTO  
HP LaserJet CM6049f - kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa  
avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei  
katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja,  
käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.  
VARO !  
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa  
toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.  
VARNING !  
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig  
laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista:  
Aallonpituus 775-795 nm Teho 5 m W Luokan 3B laser.  
292 Appendix C Regulatory information  
ENWW  
     
Substances Table (China)  
ENWW  
Safety statements 293  
 
294 Appendix C Regulatory information  
ENWW  
Index  
ADF output bin  
capacity  
buttons, control panel  
locating 12  
Symbols/Numerics  
3-bin mailbox  
capacity  
selecting 114  
touchscreen 14  
selecting 114  
specifications, physical 277  
3-bin stapler/stacker  
features 114  
Administration menu, control  
panel 15  
advanced printing options  
Windows 142  
C
cabinet/stand  
specifications, physical 277  
cable, USB  
500-sheet trays  
alerts, e-mail 74  
part number 276  
cables  
models including  
specifications, physical 277  
alternative letterhead mode 142  
anticounterfeit supplies 187  
AppleTalk settings 31  
Attention light  
USB, troubleshooting 266  
calibrate scanner 211  
calibrating scanner 52  
call report, fax 177  
Canadian DOC regulations 291  
cancel  
A
accessories  
3-bin stapler/stacker 114  
locating 12  
automatic media sensing 111  
automatic two-sided printing path  
copying documents 154  
booklet-maker finisher 114  
optional output 114  
ordering 274  
copy jobs 160  
B
print 138  
cancel a print request 138  
capacity  
part numbers 275  
acoustic specifications 280  
activity log, fax 177  
address books, e-mail  
adding addresses 167  
auto-complete function 166  
clearing 58  
deleting addresses 167  
importing 181  
LDAP support 162  
recipient lists 166  
recipient lists, creating 166  
address, printer  
billing codes report, fax 177  
bins  
capacities  
locating  
3-bin mailbox  
ADF  
output bins  
stapler/stacker  
cartridges  
selecting 114  
blank pages, troubleshooting 266  
blocked fax list, printing 177  
Bonjour Settings 74  
booklet maker  
management menu 27  
non-HP 187  
recycling 286  
replace 188  
configuring 118  
features 114  
use 116  
storage 187  
walkaround 116  
books  
copying 158  
BOOTP 89  
cartridges, print  
Macintosh status 78  
part numbers 275  
clean  
Macintosh,  
troubleshooting 270  
ADF  
capacity  
clean delivery system 206  
maintenance kit 210  
make copies from 152  
sizes supported 165  
both sides, copying 154  
both sides, printing on  
Macintosh settings 74  
browser requirements  
embedded Web server 178  
about 206, 208  
ADF delivery system 206  
ADF rollers 208  
fuser 261  
glass 206  
ENWW  
Index 295  
 
Home screen 13  
Information menu 16  
Initial Setup menu 29  
layout 12  
default settings  
outside of product 206  
touchscreen 206  
clean page, printing 261  
clock  
Resets menu 58  
defects, repeating 258  
delay, sleep 122  
density  
set 185  
lights 12  
locating  
settings 74  
collating copies 157  
color  
locking menus 184  
Management menu 27  
messages, types of 220  
Resets menu 58  
Send Setup menu 39  
Service menu 59  
settings 66, 72  
Device Behavior menu 40  
device discovery 87  
device status  
Macintosh Services tab 78  
DHCP 89  
adjusting 144  
advanced use 149  
CMYK ink set emulation 149  
edge control 144  
four-color printing 149  
halftone options 144  
HP ImageREt 4800 149  
manage 143  
diagnostics  
networks 32  
digital faxing 174  
digital sending  
Time/Scheduling menu 25  
touchscreen buttons 14  
controlling print jobs 112  
copies, number of  
Windows 142  
address books 166, 167  
configure e-mail 162  
control-panel settings 164  
embedded Web server  
settings 181  
match 147  
neutral grays 145  
Pantone® matching 148  
print color samples 147  
print in grayscale 145  
printed vs. monitor 147  
restrict use 145  
sample book matching 147  
sRGB 149  
using 143  
copy  
cancel 160  
control-panel navigation 152  
copy screen 152  
from document feeder 152  
from glass 152  
folders 169  
job settings 168  
LDAP support 162  
loading documents 165  
recipient lists 166  
sending documents 165  
Setup menu 39  
Job Mode 159  
color options 141  
Color tab settings 78  
colored text  
multiple originals 159  
photos and books 158  
set options 152  
SMTP support 162  
validating gateway  
print as black 142  
configuration page  
Information menu 16  
Macintosh 74  
settings 153  
two-sided documents 154  
copying  
ad  
dresses 267  
books 158  
workflow 170  
printing 176  
configurations, models  
configure  
trays 111  
connect product 82  
connectivity  
network utilities 92  
USB 82  
connectivity features  
control panel  
collating 157  
Digital Sending tab, embedded  
Web server 181  
DIMMs (dual inline memory  
modules)  
features  
quality, troubleshooting 258  
speed specifications  
counterfeit supplies 187  
cover pages 75, 139  
covers, locating  
custom-size paper settings  
Macintosh 75  
installing 195  
part numbers 276  
Disk Erase feature 183  
DLC/LLC settings 31  
document feeder  
copying two-sided  
D
Administration menu 15  
buttons 12  
documents 154  
document feeder kit,  
replacing 210  
double-sided copying 154  
double-sided printing  
Macintosh settings 74  
dpi, settings 74  
Data light  
locating 12  
clean touchscreen 206  
copy-screen 152  
e-mail screen 164  
E-mail Setup menu 39  
Fax Setup menu 36  
help 14  
date, set 185  
date, setting 25  
Declaration of Conformity 285  
default job options menu 18  
296 Index  
ENWW  
drivers  
Macintosh settings 75  
e-mail alerts 74  
types of 220  
firmware, upgrading 212  
first page  
Ethernet cards  
European Union, waste  
disposal 288  
use different paper 75  
folders  
sending to 169  
fonts  
Macintosh,  
troubleshooting 270  
presets (Macintosh) 75  
settings 66, 67, 72, 73  
shortcuts (Windows) 139  
supported 63  
EWS  
features 178  
EPS files, troubleshooting 271  
Explorer, versions supported  
embedded Web server 178  
e-mail  
included  
list, printing 17, 177  
Upload Macintosh 74  
formatter cover, locating  
formatter lights 257  
fraud hotline 187  
FTP, sending to 170  
fuser  
universal 64  
Windows, opening 139  
duplex  
copying documents 154  
duplex printing  
Windows 140  
duplex printing accessory  
address books 166, 167  
auto-complete function 166  
configure 162  
control-panel settings 164  
embedded Web server  
settings 181  
clean 261  
locating  
specifications, physical 277  
duplexer  
Macintosh settings 74  
duty cycle  
G
job settings 168  
gateways  
LDAP support 162  
loading documents 165  
problem solving 267  
recipient lists 166  
scan 162  
configure 162  
configuring 163  
testing 163  
E
va  
e-mail alerts 74  
lidating addresses 267  
economy settings  
sleep and wake 122  
EIO cards  
glass  
sending documents 165  
SMTP support 162  
validating gateway  
addresses 267  
clean 206  
sizes supported 165  
graphical display, control  
panel 12  
installing 199  
part number 276  
E-mail Setup menu 39  
electrical specifications 279  
embedded Web server  
assigning a password 183  
Digital Sending tab 181  
features 178  
grayscale printing 145  
F
H
fax accessory  
hard disk  
analog fax 172  
erasing 183  
heartbeat LED 257  
held jobs 127  
configure features 172  
connecting phone line 172  
digital fax 174  
energy specifications 279  
Enhanced I/O card  
Help button, control panel  
touchscreen 14  
help, control panel 14  
Home button, control panel  
touchscreen 14  
Home screen, control panel 13  
HP fraud hotline 187  
HP Jetdirect print server  
firmware updates 215  
installing 199  
part number 276  
envelope feeder  
specifications, physical 277  
envelopes  
printing schedule 26  
solve problems 267  
Fax Activity Log  
clearing 58  
jams 255  
fax reports, printing 16, 177  
Fax Setup menu 36  
faxing  
analog 172  
faxing, digital 174  
features 2, 3  
file directory, printing 177  
File Upload, Macintosh 74  
Finnish laser safety  
statement 292  
loading in tray 1 101  
environment, specifications 281  
Environmental Product  
Stewardship Program 286  
EPS files, troubleshooting 271  
erasing hard disk 183  
Error button, control panel  
touchscreen 14  
lights 257  
models including  
settings 29  
HP Jetdirect print servers  
installing 199  
error messages  
control panel 221  
Firmware Update, Macintosh 74  
ENWW  
Index 297  
envelopes 255  
recovery 251  
Japanese VCCI statement 291  
Jetadmin  
Linux software 69  
load media  
configuring 101  
loading  
HP Printer Utility 73  
HP Printer Utility, Macintosh 73  
HP Universal Print Driver 64  
HP Web Jetadmin  
firmware updates 214  
Jetadmin, HP Web 68, 182  
Jetdirect print server  
firmware updates 215  
installing 199  
documents, sizes  
supported 165  
scanner glass 165  
sizes supported 165  
tray 1 101  
firmware updates 214  
HP-UX software 69  
humidity requirements 281  
I
I/O configuration  
network configuration 88  
settings 29  
lights 257  
models including  
settings 29  
trays 2, 3, 4 102  
Lock Resources, Macintosh 74  
locking  
image drums  
Job Mode, copying 159  
job storage  
control panel menus 184  
part numbers 275  
replace 192  
M
accessing 127  
features 127  
Macintosh settings 78  
personal 129  
proof and hold 127  
QuickCopy 130  
settings 27  
Macintosh  
image fuser kit, 110 volt  
part number 275  
image fuser kit, 220 volt  
part number 275  
Information menu 16  
information pages 176  
Information tab, embedded Web  
server 179  
Initial Setup menu 29  
installers, Windows 92  
installing  
EIO cards 199  
interface ports  
AppleTalk settings 31  
driver settings 73, 75  
drivers, troubleshooting 270  
HP Printer Utility 73  
pr  
oblems,  
troubleshooting 270  
removing software 72  
resize documents 75  
software 73  
software components 92  
staple options 77  
supported operating  
systems 72  
jobs  
Macintosh settings 74  
K
keys, control panel  
locating 12  
touchscreen 14  
Korean EMC statement 291  
included  
locating  
USB card,  
L
Internet Explorer, versions  
supported  
embedded Web server 178  
Internet fax 174  
Internet protocol (IP) 88  
IP address  
troubleshooting 271  
Macintosh driver settings  
custom-size paper 75  
Job Storage 78  
LAN fax 174  
LAN-connector  
landscape orientation  
setting, Windows 140  
languages, printer  
Services tab 78  
watermarks 76  
laser safety statements 291, 292  
LDAP servers  
BOOTP 89  
changing 90  
mailbox, 3-bin  
capacity  
connect to 162  
embedded Web server  
settings 181  
input 90  
Macintosh,  
troubleshooting 270  
overview 88  
selecting 114  
specifications, physical 277  
maintenance kit 275  
manage  
validating gateway  
addresses 267  
letterhead  
IP addressing 87  
IPX/SPX setting 31  
EWS 178  
information pages 176  
supplies 187  
load 106  
J
letterhead paper, loading 142  
lights  
Management menu 27  
Material Safety Data Sheet  
(MSDS) 288  
jam-access lever, locating  
jams  
control panel 12  
formatter 257  
clearing 223  
Media 93  
common causes of 222  
link speed settings 35  
298 Index  
ENWW  
media  
custom-size, Macintosh  
networks  
AppleTalk settings 31  
orientation  
setting, Windows 140  
configuring 88  
outdoor signs  
printing 135  
output bins  
settings 75  
first page 75  
configuring gateway  
addresses 163  
connectivity features  
default gateway 91  
device discovery 87  
DHCP 89  
diagnostics 32  
DLC/LLC settings 31  
gateways 89  
HP Web Jetadmin 182  
installing EIO cards 199  
Internet Protocol (IP) 88  
IP address 87, 88, 90  
IPX/SPX settings 31  
link speed settings 35  
Macintosh settings 74  
print servers included  
protocol configuration page,  
printing 35  
loading tray 2 105  
loading tray 2, 3, and 4 104  
loading tray 2, 3, or 4 102  
pages per sheet 76  
stapler support 124  
supported sizes 95  
accessories 114  
capacities  
locating  
selecting 114  
selecting, Windows 140  
standard 114  
memory  
enabling 198  
features  
output quality  
troubleshooting 258  
included 2, 73  
part numbers 276  
Menu button 12  
menu map  
P
page order, changing 142  
pages  
blank 266  
not printing 266  
printing slowly 266  
Information menu 16  
printing 176  
menus, control panel  
Administration 15  
E-mail Setup 39  
Fax Setup 36  
Information 16  
Initial Setup 29  
locking 184  
pages per minute  
pages per sheet  
Windows 140  
paper  
protocols supported 87  
security 32  
SMTP servers 162  
subnet mask 90  
covers, using different  
paper 139  
cu  
stom size, selecting 139  
Management 27  
Resets 58  
Send Setup 39  
Service 59  
subnets 89  
TCP/IP 88  
custom-size, Macintosh  
settings 75  
first and last pages, using  
different paper 139  
first page 75  
load 101  
pages per sheet 76  
selecting 113  
TCP/IP parameters 90  
TCP/IP settings 29  
testing SMTP settings 163  
Transmission Control Protocol  
(TCP) 88  
Time/Scheduling 25  
messages  
e-mail alerts 74  
types of 220  
validating gateway  
addresses 267  
models  
source 112  
monthly duty cycle  
multiple pages per sheet  
Windows 140  
noise specifications 280  
non-HP supplies 187  
stapler support 124  
supported sizes 95  
type 98, 113  
O
N
on/off switch, locating  
type and size 113  
type, selecting 139  
paper jams  
ADF 246  
parallel port  
n-up printing  
online help, control panel 14  
operating environment  
specifications 281  
operating systems supported 62,  
Windows 140  
Netscape Navigator, versions  
supported  
embedded Web server 178  
network  
locating  
optional output accessories 114  
ordering  
part numbers  
connection 83  
accessories 275  
image drums 275  
memory 276  
Network Folder, scan to 169  
Networking tab, embedded Web  
server 181  
part numbers for 275  
supplies and accessories 274  
print cartridges 275  
ENWW  
Index 299  
print features  
paper quality options 139  
print media  
loading in tray 1 101  
supported sizes 95  
print on both sides  
Windows 140  
print paper  
Quick Sets 139  
parts  
order 275  
pausing a print request 138  
PCL drivers  
R
Ready light  
locating 12  
universal 64  
real-time clock 185  
recipient lists 166  
recycling  
personal jobs 129  
phone line, connecting fax  
accessory 172  
HP printing supplies returns and  
environmental program 287  
red eye, removing 139  
regulatory statements  
Declaration of Conformity 285  
environmental product  
stewardship program 286  
remote firmware update  
(RFU) 212  
removing Macintosh software 72  
repeating defects,  
troubleshooting 258  
replace  
photos  
for color printing 149  
types 98  
print quality  
copying 158  
improving print quality 139  
loading 165  
menu 48  
printing 133  
troubleshooting 258  
print server card  
installing 199  
removing red eye 139  
physical specifications 277  
PINs, personal jobs 129  
portrait orientation  
setting, Windows 140  
ports  
included  
locating  
troubleshooting  
Macintosh 271  
PostScript Printer Description  
(PPD) files  
print tasks 137  
printer languages  
printing  
outdoor signs 135  
output bin, selecting 114  
speed specifications  
troubleshooting 266  
image drums 192  
memory 195  
weatherproof maps 135  
printing from tray 2, 3, or 4 102  
priority, settings 66, 72  
private jobs  
cancel 138  
Windows 140  
problem-solving  
s
upplies 188  
reset button 12  
Resets menu, control panel 58  
resize documents  
Macintosh 75  
included 73  
power  
specifications 279  
troubleshooting 218  
Windows 140  
resolution  
power switch, locating  
PPDs  
included 73  
pre-printed paper  
load 106  
pre-punched paper  
load 106  
presets (Macintosh) 75  
print cartridge  
e-mail alerts 74  
Error button, control panel  
touchscreen 14  
e-mail 267  
jams 222  
messages, types of 220  
networks 32  
paper handling 252  
settings 74  
specifications  
troubleshooting quality 258  
Resolution Enhancement  
technology (REt) 74  
resolution, adjusting 139  
restore factory settings 219  
REt (Resolution Enhancement  
technology) 74  
processor speed  
product info  
managing 187  
print cartridges  
retention, job  
proof and hold  
Windows 140  
proof and hold jobs 127  
protocol configuration page,  
printing 35  
accessing 127  
features 127  
personal 129  
proof and hold 127  
QuickCopy 130  
Macintosh status 78  
management menu 27  
non-HP 187  
part numbers 275  
recycling 286  
protocols, network 87  
PS Emulation drivers 63  
rollers  
replacing 189  
clean ADF 208  
storage 187  
Q
ruler, repetitive defect 258  
print drivers  
quality  
Windows 139  
troubleshooting 258  
300 Index  
ENWW  
SMTP support 162  
validating gateway  
addresses 267  
separator page  
Windows 140  
serial number  
electrical 279  
features  
operating environment 281  
physical 277  
S
safety statements 291, 292  
scale documents  
Macintosh 75  
Windows 140  
scanner calibration 52, 211  
scanner glass  
speed dial list, printing 177  
speed specifications  
standard output bin  
locate  
Service menu, control panel 59  
Services tab  
capacity  
locating  
clean 206  
scanning  
Macintosh 78  
settings  
selecting 114  
staple cartridges  
empty, stop or continue  
settings 126  
staple options  
speed specifications  
scanning to e-mail  
about 162, 165  
driver presets (Macintosh) 75  
drivers 67, 73  
priority 66, 72  
address books 166, 167  
configure 162  
control-panel settings 164  
embedded Web server  
settings 181  
restore factory 219  
Settings tab, embedded Web  
server 180  
Macintosh 77  
Windows 140  
stapler  
shortcuts 139  
Sleep button 12  
Sleep mode  
settings 25, 27  
sleep settings  
empty, stop or continue  
settings 126  
jams, clearing 247  
paper sizes supported 124  
using 126  
job settings 168  
LDAP support 162  
loading documents 165  
recipient lists 166  
sending documents 165  
settings 162  
delay 122  
s
tapler options  
SMTP support 162  
validating addresses 267  
scanning to folder 169  
scanning to workflow 170  
Secure Disk Erase 183  
security  
power specifications 279  
wake time 122  
SMTP servers  
stapler/stacker 115  
stapler/stacker  
capacity  
configuring gateway  
address 163  
connect to 162  
testing 163  
configuring 118  
selecting 114  
specifications, physical 277  
EWS 183  
staples  
locking control panel  
menus 184  
secure disk erase 183  
settings 32  
validating gateway  
addresses 267  
software  
loading 201, 203  
stapling jobs 126  
Start button 12  
Start button, control panel  
touchscreen 14  
embedded Web server 68  
HP Printer Utility 73  
HP Web Jetadmin 68  
Macintosh 73, 92  
settings 66, 72  
supported operating  
systems 62, 72  
uninstalling Macintosh 72  
Windows 62, 92  
Solaris software 69  
space requirements 277  
special media  
security features  
Send Setup menu 39  
Send to Folder 169  
Send to Workflow 170  
sending to e-mail  
status  
embedded Web server 179  
Home screen, control  
panel 13  
HP Printer Utility,  
Macintosh 73  
about 162, 165  
address books 166, 167  
embedded Web server  
settings 181  
Macintosh services tab 78  
messages, types of 220  
Status button 12  
Stop button 12  
Stop button, control panel  
touchscreen 14  
job settings 168  
LDAP support 162  
loading documents 165  
recipient lists 166  
sending documents 165  
settings 164  
guidelines 100  
special paper  
guidelines 100  
specifications  
stopping a print request 138  
storage cabinet  
acoustic 280  
specifications, physical 277  
ENWW  
Index 301  
storage, job  
accessing 127  
temperature requirements 281  
tests  
typefaces  
included  
features 127  
networks 32  
U
Macintosh settings 74, 78  
personal 129  
proof and hold 127  
QuickCopy 130  
settings 27  
time, set 185  
uninstalling Macintosh  
software 72  
time, setting 25  
Time/Scheduling menu, control  
panel 25  
timeout settings 29  
toner  
universal print driver 64  
UNIX software 69  
upgrading firmware 212  
usage page, printing 176  
USB configuration 82  
USB connection 82  
USB port  
store jobs  
Windows 140  
storing  
print cartridges 187  
subnet mask 89, 90  
subnets 89  
density setting 74  
top cover  
locating  
touchscreen, clean 206  
Transmission Control Protocol  
(TCP) 88  
troubleshooting 266  
troubleshooting  
supplies  
Macintosh 271  
counterfeit 187  
tray 1  
locating 188  
management menu 27  
non-HP 187  
locating  
tray 2, 3, 4, 5  
load 102  
trays  
V
validating gateway  
addresses 267  
voltage specifications 279  
ordering 274  
part numbers 275  
recycling 286  
replace 188  
replacement intervals 189  
replacing 188  
Resets menu 58  
status page, printing 176  
status, viewing with embedded  
Web server 179  
status, viewing with HP Printer  
Utility 73  
automatic media sensing 111  
configure 111  
double-sided printing 77  
W
wak  
e time, setting 25, 122  
included  
Warning button, control panel  
touchscreen 14  
watermarks  
Windows 140  
weatherproof maps  
printing 135  
Web browser requirements  
embedded Web server 178  
Web Jetadmin  
firmware updates 214  
Web sites  
load 101  
Macintosh settings 74  
select paper 112  
specifications, physical 277  
troubleshooting  
blank pages 266  
checklist 218  
control panel messages 221  
duplexing 256  
EPS files 271  
gateway addresses 267  
jams 222  
Macintosh problems 270  
menu 52  
pages not printing 266  
pages printing slowly 266  
paper handling problems 252  
quality 258  
supplies 187  
supply-status, Services tab  
Macintosh 78  
Windows 141  
support  
fraud reports 187  
HP Web Jetadmin,  
downloading 182  
Material Safety Data Sheet  
(MSDS) 288  
online 141  
supported media 95  
supported utilities  
for Macintosh 74  
system requirements  
embedded Web server 178  
universal print driver 64  
Windows  
driver settings 67  
drivers supported 63  
software components 92  
supported operating  
systems 62  
repeating defects 258  
transparencies 254  
USB cables 266  
T
Taiwan EMI statement 291  
TCP/IP  
configuring 88  
TCP/IP settings 29  
TCP/IPv4 90  
TCP/IPv6 91  
TrueType fonts included  
two-sided copying 154  
two-sided printing  
universal print driver 64  
Windows 2000 fax 174  
workflow, send to 170  
Macintosh settings 74  
Windows 140  
302 Index  
ENWW  
© 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.  
www.hp.com  
*CE799-90904*  
*CE799-90904*  
CE799-90904  

Admiral AAW O6CM1FHU User Manual
Brother MFC 8820DN User Manual
Carrier 38CKC042 Air User Manual
Energizer CHFM8 User Manual
Friedrich PE07R__B User Manual
Haier AB244FCAHA User Manual
Haier AS072AZNBA User Manual
Heat Controller RADS 121H User Manual
Honda Automobiles 08W60 S5P 1A00 81 User Manual
Hudson Sales Engineering DocuCutter DC 545 User Manual